Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
BY ORDER OF THE
SECRETARY OF THE AIR FORCE
AIR FORCE INSTRUCTION 11-2C-130,
VOLUME 1
30 APRIL 2010
Flying Operations
C-130 AIRCREW TRAINING
COMPLIANCE WITH THIS PUBLICATION IS MANDATORY
ACCESSIBILITY: Publications and forms are available on the e-Publishing website at
www.e-publishing.af.mil for downloading or ordering.
RELEASABILITY: There are no releasibility restrictions on this publication.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3TA
Supersedes: AFI11-2C-130V1,
19 July 2006
Certified by: HQ USAF/A3O-A
(Col Scott L. Dennis)
Pages: 158
This volume implements Air Force Policy Directive (AFPD) 11-2, Aircraft Rules and
Procedures and AFPD 11-4, Aviation Service. It establishes United States Air Force (USAF)
aircrew training policy for C-130E/H aircrews to safely and successfully accomplish their
worldwide mobility missions. Capability requirements for the vast majority of C-130E/H
platforms include: airland or airdrop personnel, equipment, and supplies; medical evacuation of
casualties; assault airland operations to unimproved landing zones; employ in visual, instrument,
and night-vision goggle (NVG) combat environments from low, medium, or high altitude in
formation or single ship using tactics, techniques and procedures as defined in Air Force Tactics,
Techniques, and Procedures (AFTTP) 3-1.C-130, Tactical Employment, C-130E/H, AFTTP 3-
3.C-130, Combat Aircraft Fundamentals – C-130, and Air Force Instruction (AFI) 11-2C-130v3,
C-130 Operations Procedures. The Combat Delivery C-130E/H is a diverse aircraft (includes C-
130E, C-130H, C-130H1, C-130H2, C-130H3, and LC-130) tasked with performing a variety of
missions. It demands a robust and flexible training program allowing commanders to train to
capability requirements while meeting operational demands. This AFI provides the foundation
for building a C-130E/H combat capable aircrew. Ultimately it is the responsibility of the
Operations Group Commander to ensure that training profiles are relevant to meeting the needs
of the combat environment. (Note: Aeromedical Evacuation Crewmembers see AFI 11-2AEv1,
Aeromedical Evacuation Aircrew Training. AFSOC and ACC crewmembers should comply
with AFI 11-2 Series publications for their respective aircraft. C-130J crewmembers should
comply with AFI 11-2C-130Jv1. C-130 AMP guidance will be published in a future
publication.)
The use of the name or mark of any specific manufacturer, commercial product, commodity, or
service in this publication does not imply endorsement by the Air Force. This instruction applies
to Air National Guard (ANG) and Air Force Reserve Command (AFRC) units.
2 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
This publication requires the collection and or maintenance of information protected by the
Privacy Act (PA) of 1974. The authorities to collect and or maintain the records prescribed in
this publication are 37 U.S.C. 301a, Incentive pay: Pub.L. 92-204, Appropriations Act for 1973,
Section 715; Pub.L. 93-570, Appropriations Act for 1974; Pub.L. 93-294, Aviation Career
Incentive Act of 1974; DoD Directive 7730.57, Aviation Career Incentive Act and Required
Annual Report; AFI 11-401, Aviation Management; AFI 11-402, Aviation and Parachutist
Service, Aeronautical Ratings and Badges; AFI 11-421, Aviation Resource Management; and
E.O. 9397 (SSN).
Ensure that all records created as a result of processes prescribed in this publication are
maintained in accordance with Air Force Manual (AFMAN) 33-363, Management of Records
and disposed of in accordance with the Air Force Records Disposition Schedule (RDS) located at
https://www.my.af.mil/gcss-af61a/afrims/afrims/rims.cfm.
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
This revision corrects office symbols and web addresses throughout the AFI. Also, the revision
clarifies Ground and Flying Training Requirements throughout the AFI. Clarifies when training
time ends (1.7.1). Changes Aviation Resource Management System (ARMS) code for
loadmaster hazardous cargo training (Table 2.1, Table 4.1). Adds definition of Transition
Training (2.5). Updates information on senior officer courses (2.7.1). Eliminates reference to
MPD FPQ and defines MPD FPH as only C-130E/H MPD pilot (3.2.1). Corrects name of USAF
Weapons School (numerous locations). Clarifies unsupervised crewmember flying prior to
completing all initial ground training events (3.4.2). Allows unit commanders to designate
crewmembers Mission Ready for a portion of the unit mission (4.2.3). Ground Continuation
Training Requirements and associated notes have been clarified for all crewmembers (Table 4.1).
Removes Ground Training Levels from Ground Training Tables. Removes Flying Training
Level D from all Flying Training Tables. Move Refresher Simulator and Navigator Refresher
Training to Flying Training Tables. Added Flight Surgeon Ground Training Table (Table 4.3).
Pilot, Flight Engineer and Navigator Semi-Annual Continuation Training Flying Requirements
and associated notes have been updated, corrected, and clarified (Table 4.4.). Flight Engineer
and Loadmaster Semi-Annual Continuation Training Flying Requirements and associated notes
have been updated, corrected, and clarified (Table 4.5.). Clarifies waiver for overdue ground
training (4.9.3.3). Allows Pilots NMR for unaided night events to fly unsupervised on local
training day missions (Table 4.7). Clarifies C-130 Pilot Development and deletes requirement
for MPD Tracking (5.2). Deletes PNAF discussion (5.9). Add JPADS discussion (5.9).
Updates LC-130 Ski Guidance (5.17). Local proficiency Sortie guidance (B011) merged with
Proficiency Sortie (M010, 7.11). Clarifies Theater Indoctrination (M060) guidance (7.11).
Clarifies NVG Events for Loadmasters (NV02, NV05). Allows Navigators to credit ACDTQT
(P280) during preflight or in Satellite Navigation Trainer. Adds and clarifies Qualification and
Certification codes (7.14). Clarifies MPD responsibilities during Arrival and Departure Events
(7.15). Clarifies definition of Annual, Biennial, and Triennial (Atch 1). Clarifies guidance for
AF Form 4025 (A2.1.5).
Chapter 1—GENERAL 7
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 3
1.1. Training Objective. ................................................................................................ 7
1.2. Key Words Explained. ........................................................................................... 7
1.3. Administration. ...................................................................................................... 7
1.4. Responsibilities. ..................................................................................................... 7
1.5. Waiver Authority. .................................................................................................. 11
Table 1.1. Processing Waivers to AFI 11-2C-130 Volume 1. ................................................ 12
Figure 1.1. Sample Waiver Request Format. ........................................................................... 14
1.6. Use of Flying Hours. .............................................................................................. 14
1.7. In-Unit Training Time Limitations. ....................................................................... 15
Table 1.2. In-Unit Training Time Limitations. ....................................................................... 15
1.8. Training Documentation. ....................................................................................... 16
1.9. Flight Examiner Usage. ......................................................................................... 16
1.10. Instructor Training and Supervision Requirements. .............................................. 16
1.11. Distribution. ........................................................................................................... 16
1.12. Transfer of Aircrews. ............................................................................................. 16
1.13. Aircrew Training While DNIF. .............................................................................. 17
1.14. Aircrew Rated Management Overview. ................................................................ 17
1.15. Information Management. ...................................................................................... 18
1.16. Failure to Progress or Complete Training. ............................................................. 18
1.17. Career Enlisted Aviator (CEA). ............................................................................. 18
Chapter 2—INITIAL QUALIFICATION TRAINING 19
2.1. General Requirements. ........................................................................................... 19
2.2. Initial Qualification Training (IQT) Prerequisites: ................................................ 19
2.3. Ground Training Requirements. ............................................................................ 19
Table 2.1. Initial Qualification Ground Training Requirements. ............................................ 19
2.4. Flying Training Requirements. .............................................................................. 21
2.5. Conversion, Transition and Difference Training. .................................................. 21
2.6. Multiple Qualifications. ......................................................................................... 22
2.7. Senior Officer Qualification Training Requirements. ............................................ 23
2.8. Flight Surgeons. ..................................................................................................... 23
2.9. Requalification Training. ....................................................................................... 23
Chapter 3—MISSION QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION TRAINING 24
3.1. Description. ............................................................................................................ 24
4 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
3.2. Time Periods for Mission Qualification and Certification Training. ..................... 24
3.3. Ground Training Requirements. ............................................................................ 24
Table 3.1. Mission Qualification Ground Training Requirements. ........................................ 25
3.4. Flying Training Requirements. .............................................................................. 25
3.5. Aircraft Defensive Systems (ADS). ....................................................................... 26
Chapter 4—CONTINUATION TRAINING 28
4.1. Description. ............................................................................................................ 28
4.2. Aircrew Status. ....................................................................................................... 28
4.3. Flying Training Levels (FTL). ............................................................................... 28
4.4. Training Events/Tables. ......................................................................................... 29
4.5. Continuation Training Requirements. .................................................................... 30
Table 4.1. Ground Continuation Training Requirements. ....................................................... 31
Table 4.2. Mobility Training Requirements. ........................................................................... 32
Table 4.3. Flight Surgeon Ground Continuation Training Requirements. .............................. 33
Table 4.4. Pilot and Navigator Semi-Annual Continuation Flying Requirements. ................. 35
Table 4.5. Engineer and Loadmaster Semi-Annual Continuation Flying Requirements. ....... 38
4.6. Flight Surgeon Continuation Training Flying Requirements. ............................... 39
4.7. Additional Ancillary Training. ............................................................................... 39
4.8. Proration of Training. ............................................................................................ 39
Table 4.6. Individual Availability. .......................................................................................... 40
4.9. Failure to Complete Training Requirements. ......................................................... 40
Table 4.7. NMR Flying Restrictions. ...................................................................................... 41
4.10. Requirements Before PCS or TDY by Rated Members on Active Flying Status. . 43
4.11. Requirements Before Removal From Active Flying Status. .................................. 43
4.12. Requirements While in Inactive Flying Status. ..................................................... 43
4.13. Retraining. .............................................................................................................. 43
4.14. Aircrew Flying in Non-US Air Force Aircraft and with Non-US Air Force Units. 43
4.15. Training Period. ..................................................................................................... 43
Chapter 5—UPGRADE TRAINING 44
5.1. Description. ............................................................................................................ 44
Table 5.1. Aircrew Qualification / Upgrade Prerequisites. ..................................................... 44
5.2. C-130 Mobility Pilot Development (MPD). .......................................................... 45
Table 5.2. Pilot Designation Codes. ........................................................................................ 45
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 5
5.3. Aircraft Commander (AC). .................................................................................... 46
5.4. Aircrew Instructor Program. .................................................................................. 48
5.5. Flight Examiner Certification. ............................................................................... 50
5.6. Lead Certification. ................................................................................................. 50
5.7. Night Vision Goggle (NVG) Training. .................................................................. 51
5.8. Phoenix Banner Certification. ................................................................................ 52
5.9. Joint Precision Airdrop System (JPADS) Certification. ........................................ 52
5.10. Unimproved Landing Certification. ....................................................................... 53
5.11. Functional Check Flight (FCF) Certification. ........................................................ 54
5.12. Touch and Go Landing Certification. .................................................................... 54
5.13. Medium and High Altitude Aerial Delivery Certification. .................................... 54
5.14. Grid Navigation Certification. ............................................................................... 54
5.15. Modular Airborne Fire Fighting System (MAFFS). .............................................. 55
Table 5.3. MAFFS Ground Continuation Training Events (Pilots and Loadmasters). ........... 56
Table 5.4. MAFFS Mission Continuation Flying Requirements (Pilots and Loadmasters). .. 57
5.16. Aerial Spray Certification. ..................................................................................... 57
Table 5.5. Aerial Spray Semiannual Continuation Flying Requirements. .............................. 59
5.17. LC-130 Ski Mission Qualification Training. ......................................................... 60
Table 5.6. LC-130 Ground Continuation Training Requirements. ......................................... 65
Table 5.7. LC-130 Mobility Training Requirements. ............................................................. 66
Table 5.8. LC-130 Semi-Annual Continuation Flying Requirements (Pilots, Navigator). ..... 67
Table 5.9. LC-130 E ................................................................................................................ 70
Chapter 6—AIRCREW TRAINING SYSTEM (ATS) 71
6.1. Description. ............................................................................................................ 71
6.2. Applicability. ......................................................................................................... 71
6.3. Dedicated Training Time. ...................................................................................... 71
6.4. ATS Course Prerequisites. ..................................................................................... 71
6.5. Lesson Objectives: ................................................................................................. 71
6.6. Unsatisfactory Student Progress. ........................................................................... 72
6.7. Courseware Changes. ............................................................................................. 73
6.8. Scheduling: ............................................................................................................ 73
6.9. Administration: ...................................................................................................... 74
6.10. Aircraft Flights for ATS Training Instructors. ....................................................... 75
6 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
6.11. C-130 ATS Facility Tours. .................................................................................... 75
Chapter 7—ARMS IDENTIFIERS 77
7.1. Description. ............................................................................................................ 77
Table 7.1. ARMS Identifiers. .................................................................................................. 77
7.2. Academic Training Identifiers. .............................................................................. 77
7.3. USAF-Specified Training Events. ......................................................................... 78
7.4. Airdrop (AD) Events. ............................................................................................ 78
7.5. Airland (AS) Events. .............................................................................................. 83
7.6. Navigation and Individual Proficiency Training (B, GD, N) Events. .................... 85
7.7. Miscellaneous (C, E, FE) Events. .......................................................................... 86
7.8. Formation Departure / Recovery (FR) Events. ...................................................... 88
7.9. Ground Training (G) Events. ................................................................................. 89
7.10. Aircrew Flight Equipment Training (LL) Events. ................................................. 99
7.11. Mission-Specific (M) Training Events. ................................................................. 100
7.12. NVG (NV) Events. ................................................................................................ 103
7.13. Aircrew and Individual Proficiency Training (P) Events. ..................................... 107
7.14. Qualification and Certification (Q) Training Events. ............................................ 111
7.15. Arrival and Departure (RS) Events. ....................................................................... 114
7.16. SKE (SK) Events. .................................................................................................. 117
7.17. Special Certification Training (SP) Events. ........................................................... 118
7.18. Survival (―SS‖) Events. ......................................................................................... 119
7.19. Global Ready Aircraft Commander Course (V). ................................................... 121
7.20. Visual Low Level (VL) Events. ............................................................................. 121
7.21. Visual Threat Recognition and Avoidance Trainer (VTRAT) Training (VT) Events. 122
7.22. Unit Defined ("X") Events. .................................................................................... 123
7.23. Forms. .................................................................................................................... 123
Attachment 1—GLOSSARY OF REFERENCES AND SUPPORTING INFORMATION 124
Attachment 2—AIRCREW TRAINING DOCUMENTATION 140
Attachment 3—C-130 ATS COURSES 150
Attachment 4—AIRDROP SCORING 157
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 7
Chapter 1
GENERAL
1.1. Training Objective. This instruction prescribes basic policy and guidance for training
United States Air Force Combat Delivery C-130E/H crewmembers according to AFI 11-202v1,
Aircrew Training. The overall objective of the aircrew training program is to develop and
maintain a high state of mission readiness for the immediate and effective employment in
exercises, peacekeeping operations, contingencies, and war in any environment.
1.2. Key Words Explained.
1.2.1. ―Will‖ and ―shall‖ indicate a mandatory requirement.
1.2.2. ―Should‖ is normally used to indicate a preferred, but not mandatory, method of
accomplishment.
1.2.3. ―May‖ indicates an acceptable or suggested means of accomplishment.
1.2.4. ―Note‖ indicates operating procedures, techniques, etc., which are considered essential
to emphasize.
1.3. Administration.
1.3.1. Recommendation for Change. Submit suggested improvements to this instruction on
AF Form 847, Recommendation for Change of Publication, through MAJCOM channels to
HQ AMC/A3T according to AFI 11-215, USAF Flight Manuals Program (FMP). Send
proposals for amending existing course prerequisites or recommendations to change or delete
obsolete courseware through the appropriate MAJCOM training staff to the OPR. The OPR
address is HQ AMC/A3T, 402 Scott Drive, Unit 3A1, Scott AFB, IL, 62225-5302.
1.3.2. Supplements. This AFI is a basic directive. Each MAJCOM or operational theater
may supplement this AFI IAW AFI 33-360, Publications and Forms Management.
MAJCOM supplements may be more, but not less restrictive than this instruction.
MAJCOMs may set training requirements lower than specified in this instruction when the
statement ―or as specified in MAJCOM supplement‖ is indicated as applicable to that item or
event. MAJCOM supplements will be coordinated through HQ AMC/A3T and approved by
HQ AF/A3O-AT before publication. Air National Guard (ANG) is considered a MAJCOM
and NGB/A3O is considered the equivalent of MAJCOM/A3T for purposes of this
instruction.
1.3.3. Local Training Procedures. Wings or groups may publish local training procedures;
however, units may not change AFI guidance except where noted. Units will send one copy
of their local training procedures to the parent MAJCOM Training OPR.
1.3.4. This document refers to ancillary training requirements controlled by other AFI's and
provides guidance derived from those AFI's. The governing AFI may be updated after the
publication of this document, so it is necessary to refer to the source document AFI for
current guidance. If a conflict is identified for an ancillary training requirement, comply with
the source document that establishes the training requirement.
1.4. Responsibilities.
8 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
1.4.1. Lead Command. Air Mobility Command (AMC) is designated lead command for the
C-130 Mission Design Series (MDS) combat delivery aircraft according to AFPD 10-9, Lead
Operating Command Weapon System Management, AFPD 11-2, and AFPD 10-21, Air
Mobility Lead Command Roles and Responsibilities. The lead command is responsible for
establishing and standardizing aircrew flying training requirements in coordination with user
commands. HQ AMC/A3 delegates to HQ AMC/A3T the authority to manage all training
course requirements and training tasks. HQ AMC/A3T is the OPR for this AFI
1.4.1.1. Courses. AMC/A3T, in coordination with Air Education Training Command
(AETC) and User commands, approves/fields continuation training and locally taught
upgrade courses.
1.4.1.2. Realistic Training Review Board (RTRB). HQ AMC/A3T will host a RTRB
biennially, or more frequently, as required. The RTRB reviews all training programs for
currency, applicability, compliance, and effectiveness. Attendees should include Mobility
Air Forces (MAF) representatives and Aircrew Training System (ATS) instructors, as
applicable.
1.4.1.3. AMC/A3T Detachment 3 AMCAOS (AMC Air Operations Squadron) is located
at Little Rock AFB, AR. It provides the government oversight of the C-130 Aircrew
Training System (ATS) contract and consists of two divisions: Simulator Certification
(DOUS) and Quality Assurance (DOUQ).
1.4.1.3.1. Detachment 3 conducts Simulator Certification (SIMCERT) on all aircrew
training devices (ATDs) according to AFI 36-2251, Management of Air Force
Training Systems, or when necessary, ATD Modification and Configuration Change
guidance. SIMCERT includes testing, inventory inspections, Quality Assurance
Issues (QAI) and contract compliance evaluations.
1.4.1.3.2. Detachment 3 provides day-to-day C-130 ATS contract administration and
oversees Configuration Management (CM), Logistics, and Engineering practices. It
ensures continued Government control of all baselines and provides product
acceptance recommendations for the Government to the Program Manager (PM).
Detachment 3 develops and maintains the Quality Assurance Surveillance Plan
(QASP) and is the central collection point for Quality Assurance (QA) data. It
conducts formal technical reviews, including Functional Configuration Audits (FCA)
and Physical Configuration Audits (PCA), and reviews Engineering Change
Proposals (ECP) and Contractor Plans.
1.4.2. Training Command. AETC is the designated training command for C-130 training.
AETC/A3 is responsible for formal school syllabi and is the approval authority for changes
in coordination with lead and user commands according to AFI 11-202v1. AETC/A3
designates AETC/A3Z to oversee formal school courses and syllabus management in
coordination with the lead command and ATS contractor. Formal school syllabi are available
at AETC bookstore at https://aetc_uft.randolph.af.mil/bookstore/c-130.htm. AETC/A3R
develops and publishes the Programmed Flying Training (PFT) in accordance with the HQ
AF/A3O-AT Flying Training CONOPS (see paragraph 1.14.2) and allocates and manages
training quotas within the formal school capacity.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 9
1.4.2.1. Progress Review (PR). See AFI 11-202v1 and AFI 11-402. AETC will notify the
student’s gaining unit of PR action delaying the students scheduled graduation date. If
the PR recommends a Flying Evaluation Board, AETC will notify the student’s gaining
MAJCOM.
1.4.2.2. AETC maintains a list of formal school courses in the Education and Training
Course Announcement (ETCA). The site address is: https://etca.randolph.af.mil/.
1.4.2.3. The 714 TRS/TRT at Little Rock AFB provides government oversight of the
ATS contractor through courseware audits, instructor evaluations, and courseware quality
assurance. The 714 TRS/TRT provides program level quality assurance for curriculum.
The 714 TRS/TRT ensures services provided by the ATS contractor comply with
contractual requirements and guidelines, ensures courseware improvement through
regular involvement in the Curriculum Configuration Working Group (CCWG) and
ensures formal school and continuation training instructional quality through regular site
audits.
1.4.2.4. The 714 TRS/TRT may conduct periodic Contract Compliance Evaluations
(CCE) for C-130 ATS-supported sites according to AMC/AETC Memorandum of
Understanding (MOU) for Realignment of Aircrew Training Systems Responsibilities, 1
Apr 2006. The 714 TRS/TRT will send CCE results to HQ AMC/A3T and ATS contract
management.
1.4.3. User Commands.
1.4.3.1. Student Management. MAJCOM training staff will manage student training
according to paragraph 1.14.2.
1.4.3.2. Recall Procedures. Comply with paragraph 1.16. Formal notifications to recall
students from a formal school will be sent from the student's squadron commander
(Sq/CC) to operations group commander (OG/CC) to MAJCOM/A3T (email format is
acceptable). MAJCOM/A3T will submit approved recall letter (email or Fax) to
AETC/A3R for follow on coordination with 19 AF and Formal Training Unit (FTU)
Registrar. Emergency recall during non-duty hours may be coordinated directly with
applicable FTU Registrar, with follow up coordination with AETC/A3R & 19 AF on the
next duty day.
1.4.4. Wing Commander. WG/CC will ensure unit/local level agencies and facilities support
aircrew ground training programs. Host and/or co-located units will develop local agreements
to consolidate aircrew training support base-wide.
1.4.5. Operations Groups.
1.4.5.1. The OG/CC will convene a Training Review Panel (TRP) to be chaired by the
OG/CC or a designated representative. Panel members should include representatives
from squadron training, tactics, operations, safety and other areas as determined by the
commander (i.e. ATS contractors, ARMS). Airlift Group Commanders (AG/CC) are
considered the equivalent of OG/CC for purposes of this instruction.
1.4.5.1.1. TRP Requirements. Convene the TRP per calendar semi-annual period
and maintain minutes for a period of two years (commanders may increase this
frequency as required). Squadrons and detachments not collocated with their OG
10 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
may conduct their own panel or provide representation to the unit's TRP. Panel
minutes from non-collocated squadron and detachment TRPs will be forwarded to
their OG training office for inclusion in their OG TRP.
1.4.5.1.2. TRP Format. The TRP should review staff and crewmember management
actions necessary to complete squadron flight and ground training programs.
Suggested TRP topics include, but are not limited to current and forecast Flight
Training Levels (FTL), upgrade and Continuation Training (CT) status, semi-annual
requirement completion rates, crew position gains/losses, Aircraft Commander,
Instructor and Evaluator upgrades. Units should also review all unit-defined training
―X‖ events for relevancy.
1.4.5.2. The OG/CC will develop and maintain procedures with their local servicing
Military Personnel Flight (MPF) for individual crewmember counseling and personnel
system updates affecting an Active Duty Service Commitment (ADSC) incurred from
training described in this AFI. See AFI 11-202v1, AFI 36-2107, Active Duty Service
Commitments, and course listing in ETCA for more information.
1.4.5.3. OG/CC may develop additional training requirements and/or programs as
necessary to meet unit mission requirements. Units may include these requirements in
local training procedures.
1.4.5.4. OG/CC is responsible for establishing and maintaining the academic training
program for non-ATS courses (may be delegated to squadron level). The OG (or
squadron OPR) will:
1.4.5.4.1. Appoint primary and alternate instructors for each non-ATS course to be
taught.
1.4.5.4.2. Publish a ground training schedule to include date, time, location,
instructor and designated crewmembers for each course (both ATS and non-ATS).
OG/CC may specify extra training periods as required.
1.4.5.4.3. Use MAJCOM, ATS, or unit-developed training products and/or syllabus
for all courses, as applicable. Units will reproduce courseware as applicable.
1.4.5.4.4. Develop a procedure to monitor the academic training program for course
content, currency of materials, instructor availability, and status of training aids.
Squadrons should recommend to the commander changes to existing courses or
additional academic training courses required, based on crewmember feedback.
1.4.5.4.5. Send recommendations for changes, additions, and deletions of courses
through appropriate channels to appropriate MAJCOM with an information copy to
HQ AMC/A3T.
1.4.5.5. Instructor Selection and Training. The OG/CC will select course instructors for
non-ATS courses on the basis of professional qualifications and aptitude to teach. Local
Academics instructor program will follow guidance in AFMAN 36-2236, Guidebook for
Air Force Instructors. An individual who instructs a class will receive credit for that
academic training requirement.
1.4.6. Squadrons. Sq/CC or designated representative will:
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 11
1.4.6.1. Ensure crewmembers complete in-unit mission, ground, and continuation
training programs. Failure to reasonably progress may require action for removal.
1.4.6.2. Before each semi-annual training period, assign Flying Training Levels (FTL) to
assigned and attached crewmembers (see Chapter 4).
1.4.6.3. Ensure formal school post-graduate questionnaires are completed. Complete the
questionnaires on the AETC web-site at: https://www.my.af.mil/agepiftprod.
1.4.6.4. Ensure adequate training continuity and supervision of assigned and attached
crewmembers. Unit commanders may assign additional requirements based on individual
crewmember’s experience and proficiency.
1.4.6.5. Review training and evaluation records of newly assigned or attached
crewmembers and those completing formal training, to determine the training required to
certify the individual as Basic Aircraft Qualified (BAQ), Basic Mission Capable (BMC),
or Mission Ready (MR).
1.4.6.6. Execute unit-level aircrew certifications described in this instruction.
1.4.6.7. Review qualifications and monitor training requirements for squadron-assigned
Flight Surgeons.
1.4.6.8. Ensure flight commanders or designated squadron representative monitor quality
of training, identify training deficiencies, and advise Sq/CC of additional training needs.
1.4.7. Training Site with ATS Contractor. The C-130 ATS contractor is responsible for
academic and aircrew training device (ATD) instruction at the formal schools and specialized
training at all USAF C-130 training sites. This responsibility includes developing, updating
and publishing courseware and the formal school syllabus in accordance with the ATS
contract (see Chapter 6).
1.5. Waiver Authority.
1.5.1. Do not deviate from the policies and requirements in this instruction. Report
deviations or exceptions without waiver through channels to MAJCOM/A3T who, in turn,
should notify the OPR for follow-on action, if necessary.
1.5.2. Unless specified in this instruction, MAJCOM/A3T is the designated waiver authority
for specific crewmember training requirements in this instruction not governed by AFI 11-
202v1 or another AFI.
1.5.3. OG/CC is designated waiver authority for minimum flying-hour prerequisites for
entry into formal upgrade courses (see Table 5.1).
1.5.4. When a student is entered into a formal course, HQ AETC/A2/3 designates 19 AF/DO
as waiver authority for AETC flying training syllabus and formal school prerequisites
(exceptions see paragraph 1.5.3. and paragraph 1.5.5.). Submit waiver requests electronically
or in writing, on AETC Form 6, Waiver Request, to the following approval authorities: (19
AF/DO for AETC training. 19 AF will provide an information copy of all approved waivers
to AETC/A3Z). All requests for a syllabus waiver will include supporting rationale.
Forward waiver requests to MAJCOM A3T with supporting rationale. User command
training staff should submit prerequisite waiver requests direct to 19 AF/DO. All waivers
shall be approved before the crewmember departs for formal training. File a copy of all
12 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
waivers in the trainee’s training folder and have the student hand-carry a copy to the training
location.
1.5.4.1. Prerequisites. For formal school course prerequisite waiver requests, see the
appropriate course syllabus.
1.5.4.2. Formal School Training. Any planned exception to a formal course syllabus
requires a syllabus waiver. See the appropriate formal course syllabus for waiver
authority. The formal school OG is designated waiver authority for completion of
specific formal school events with the concurrence of the gaining unit’s OG/CC.
OG/CCs will forward copies of waivers to MAJCOM/A3T.
1.5.4.2.1. If required for squadron’s designated mission, accomplish events waived
or not accomplished at the formal schools in-unit before assigning mission-ready
(MR) status.
1.5.5. In-Unit Training Waiver. MAJCOM/A3T is approval/waiver authority for in-unit
training. Provide information copies of any waivers to AETC/A3Z and AMC/A3T. Before
approval, review the appropriate syllabus and consider availability of ATS formal instruction
and ATD requirements. All in-unit training will utilize formal school courseware in
accordance with AFI 11-202v1. MAJCOMs will coordinate with 714 TRS to arrange
courseware delivery to the unit for in-unit training.
1.5.6. Senior Officer Course (SOC) Waiver. See formal course syllabus and AFI 11-202v1.
1.5.7. Continuation Training Waiver. The OG/CC is designated waiver authority for ground
and flying continuation training requirements in Chapter 4 for assigned or attached
crewmembers on a case-by-case basis (see paragraph 4.9). Waivers for training events
missed in consecutive training periods will require MAJCOM/A3T approval.
1.5.8. Waiver Format. MAJCOMs will establish waiver processes that may consist of on-
line or web service, prescribed forms, or other standardized means. Submit waivers
according to Table 1.1 using the format in Figure 1.1. Place a copy of approved waivers in
the individual’s training folder. Waivers for training not documented in a training folder
(such as currency) will be filed in the permanent training folder or maintained by the OG/CC
(or designated representative) for 24 months.
Table 1.1. Processing Waivers to AFI 11-2C-130 Volume 1.
If Waiver is
Requested by:
(Notes 1, 2)
Send Waiver Request
To:
Waiver Authority
Will Send Approval
Or Disapproval To:
With Information
Copies To:
Active Duty AMC
Airlift Wing or
Group
OG Training Office To
HQ AMC/A3T
OG Training Office
USAFE Airlift Wing OG Training Office To
HQ USAFE/A3T
OG/CC
Active Duty PACAF
Airlift Wing
OG/CC to HQ
PACAF/A3T
OG/CC
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 13
AETC FTU
(including
AFRC/ANG) (Note 3)
OG Training Office To
19AF/DO
OG/CC HQ AETC/A3ZM
HQ AFRC/A3TA
NGB/A3O
22 AF/A3T
AFRC Unit (except
AETC FTU)
Through 22 AF/A3T
To HQ AFRC/A3TA
AFRC Unit 22 AF/A3T
HQ AMC/A3TA
ANG Unit (except
AETC FTU)
NGB/A3O ANG Unit HQ AMC/A3TA
29 WPS (WIC) USAFWS/CO to
HQ ACC/A3T
USAFWS/CO
NOTES:
1. Units will submit secondary method training waiver requests through MAJCOM channels.
MAJCOMs will coordinate with 714 TRS/TRT to arrange courseware delivery to the unit.
2. References to operations groups and wings may be applied to airlift groups; references to
operations group training offices may apply to wing-level training offices.
3. AFRC units will send request through 22AF and AFRC/A3TA. AFRC/A3TA will determine
if waiver needs 19AF/DO review. ANG units will send waiver to NGB/A3O. NGB/A3O will
determine if waiver needs 19AF/DO review.
14 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Figure 1.1. Sample Waiver Request Format.
1.6. Use of Flying Hours.
1.6.1. Structure unit flying training missions to achieve optimum training. Any by-product
airlift opportunity resulting from training will not degrade the intended training and will
comply with applicable Department of Defense (DoD) Regulation 4515.13R, Air
Transportation Eligibility, AFI 11-401, and AFI 11-202v1.
1.6.1.1. It is essential that all personnel at every level prevent the misuse of air mobility
resources as well as the perception of their misuse when planning and executing training
missions.
1.6.1.2. See AFI 11-2C-130v3 for off-station training flight requirements.
1.6.2. Training on Operational Missions. Unless specifically prohibited or restricted by
weapon system operating procedures or specific theater operations order (OPORD), the
OG/CC exercising operational control may approve upgrade, qualification or special
qualification training on operational missions. Commanders will ensure the training will not
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 15
impact mission effectiveness and the crewmember receiving training is under the supervision
of an instructor of like specialty. Comply with passenger-carrying restrictions in AFI 11-401
and AFI 11-2C-130v3.
1.7. In-Unit Training Time Limitations. Comply with the time limitations in Table 1.2
Crewmembers entered in an in-unit training program leading to qualification (or re-qualification)
will be dedicated to that training program on a full-time basis (OG/CC will approve any
exceptions).
1.7.1. Training time start date is the date when the first significant training event (a training
event directly contributing to qualification, certification, or upgrade) has begun, e.g.,
Computer-Based Training (CBT) lesson, Part Task Trainer (PTT), Weapon System Trainer
(WST), ground training, flight, etc.; or 45-days (90-days ARC) after being attached or
assigned to the unit after completion of the formal school; whichever occurs first. Training
time ends with the syllabus completion.
1.7.2. Units will notify the appropriate MAJCOM/A3T in writing before the crewmember
exceeds upgrade training time limits in Table 1.2. Sq/CC may extend listed training times
up to 60 days (120 days ARC) provided appropriate documentation is included in the training
folder. In such cases, notification to MAJCOM/A3T is not required.
1.7.2.1. Extensions exceeding 60 days (120 days ARC) require MAJCOM/A3T
approval.
1.7.2.2. Use the waiver request format specified in paragraph 1.5.8. Include training
difficulty, unit corrective action to resolve and prevent recurrence, and estimated
completion date.
Table 1.2. In-Unit Training Time Limitations.
Training Time Limit Time Limit ARC
Initial Qualification 120 days 240 days
Difference Training 90 days 90 days
Re-qualification 90 days 180 days
Mission Certification
Includes in-unit training leading to
MR status following initial, difference,
or requalification training (Note 1).
90 days 180 days
Unit Indoctrination / Theater
Indoctrination 45 days 90 days
Instructor Upgrade 60 days 120 days
AWADS (Note 2) 90 days 180 days
Lead Upgrade 90 days 180 days
MPD Pilot Check-Out Course
(PCO) 120 days 240 days
16 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
NOTES:
1. Mission Certification time limit for cross-flow pilots is 120-days (240 days ARC).
2. Adverse Weather Aerial Delivery System. Normally accomplished in conjunction with
lead or element lead training (see paragraph 5.6), but may also be accomplished separately
or as part of Unit /Theater Indoctrination.
1.8. Training Documentation. Units will use the AF Form 4324, Aircraft Assignment/Aircrew
Qualification Worksheet, to update aircrew certifications in ARMS. Section 2 will be used to
document award of specific ARMS ―Q‖ code identifiers. Specifically, block 22 will contain the
―Q‖ code (i.e. QXXX) and Certification Name (i.e. Phoenix Banner). See Chapter 7 for specific
―Q‖ codes. See Attachment 2 for additional training documentation requirements.
1.9. Flight Examiner Usage. Use flight examiners as instructors for any phase of training to
capitalize on their expertise and experience. If a flight examiner is the primary instructor to train
an individual, the same flight examiner should not administer the associated evaluation.
1.10. Instructor Training and Supervision Requirements.
1.10.1. All instructors should be MR (wing level and below).
1.10.2. When performing crewmember duties, the following personnel will be under direct
supervision of an instructor of like specialty:
1.10.2.1. All NMR crewmembers while performing the specific event(s) for which they
are NMR (See paragraph 4.9).
1.10.2.2. All crewmembers in initial, upgrade or re-qualification flying training unless
syllabus states direct supervision is not required. Upgrade students may fly without an
instructor when performing duties not related to the upgrade, unless otherwise restricted.
Note: For students completing AWADS airdrop upgrade who are MR in Station Keeping
Equipment (SKE) formation and SKE airdrop, an instructor pilot does not have to be in
the seat. For pilots upgrading to NVG airdrop, formation lead or element lead who are
MR in formation and airdrop events required by the appropriate syllabus, the instructor
pilot does not have to be in the seat.
1.10.2.3. For SKE or Visual formation (as required) and visual airdrop MR pilots who
are NMR for NVG airdrop, SKE airdrop or AWADS airdrop and are trying to regain MR
status, the instructor pilot does not have to occupy one of the pilot seats.
1.10.2.4. Senior officers who have completed only the Senior Officer Course (SOC) A
and/or B courses. (See paragraph 2.7.1).
1.10.2.5. Any other personnel designated by the wing, OG, or Sq/CC.
1.11. Distribution. Units will establish distribution requirements of this AFI.
1.12. Transfer of Aircrews.
1.12.1. Validated training completed prior to transfer will be honored by the gaining
organization and will be used to determine the appropriate training phase and training level
where the newly assigned crewmember is placed. Aircrew personnel qualified in the same
mission-design-series (MDS) are considered qualified in that equipment throughout the force
when used for the same mission. Difference training is required for a change in aircraft series
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 17
between C-130E and C-130H (to include H, H1, H2 and H3) aircraft. For intracommand and
intercommand transfers and exchange officers, instructor training and qualifications may be
accepted at the discretion of the gaining unit commander.
1.12.1.1. Foreign exchange officers should arrive at the duty station qualified in the C-
130 with a current physical and current physiological training. Mission qualification
training should also have been completed. Exchange officers arriving from the formal
school will complete local proficiency flying, unit indoctrination and the following
ground training events: Aircrew Flight Equipment, Aeromedical Rigging, Combat
Offload, Initial Crew Resource Management (CRM), marshalling exam. Those who
arrive qualified from their country will complete the instrument refresher course (IRC),
instrument written examination, simulator refresher, qualification open and closed-book
examinations, flight evaluations, difference training, local proficiency and unit
indoctrination. They will also complete physiological training, ground egress training,
local area survival, and a flight physical if proper documentation cannot be produced.
1.12.1.2. Requirements for foreign exchange officers to complete training that
incorporates classified information, including G060 Tactics, G070 Aircrew Intelligence
Training, G080 Communications Procedures, and M060 Theater Indoctrination Training
will vary by country, security clearance, need to know, and specific exchange agreement.
Consult the base Foreign Disclosure Officer (FDO) to determine an individual's
eligibility to receive classified training. For example, some countries' exchange officers
are only eligible to complete these events if they will deploy with their host U.S. unit.
Some exchange officers may not complete any, and others have no restrictions and may
complete all of these events.
1.12.1.3. Partially mission qualified crewmembers (e.g., visual formation but not SKE)
may be fully qualified in-unit with appropriate ATS courseware. Request waiver from
MAJCOM/A3T.
1.13. Aircrew Training While DNIF. Crewmembers whose status is "duty not involving
flying" (DNIF) may complete ground training events, including simulator training, if the
member’s physical condition allows. Consult the flight surgeon initiating the AF Form 1042,
Medical Recommendation for Flying or Special Operational Duty, if the DNIF status includes
ground training limitations.
1.14. Aircrew Rated Management Overview.
1.14.1. Programmed Flying Training (PFT). AETC/A3R manages the training command’s
role in the HQ AF/A3O-AT Flying Training CONOPS. A key product of this process is the
PFT. The PFT balances available training quotas, ATS throughput, schoolhouse capacities
and course requirements on a Fiscal Year basis. Annually, units will send projected PFT
requirements to their respective MAJCOM training staff, who in turn forward projections to
HQ AF/A3O-AT, for inclusion into the Graduate Program Requirements Document (GPRD).
AETC/A3R will determine training capacity and report shortfall in the GPRD to HQ
AF/A3O-AT.
1.14.1.1. HQ AF/A3O-AT sponsors an annual PFT conference for attendees to balance
training capacity, MAJCOM training requests, and pipeline UPT/CSO/BFE/BLM
students against Formal Training Unit (FTU) capacity. AETC/A3R allocates approved
18 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
quotas to lead and each user command, which in-turn allocate training quotas to each
unit. HQ AETC/A3R publishes the annual PFT quota workbook on web site:
https://afkm.wpafb.af.mil/AETCPFT.
1.14.1.2. Throughout the training year, MAJCOM training staff and AETC PFT
managers use assigned/allocated training quotas to assign individual crewmembers into
the C-130 formal schools. Daily student quota adjustments to the annual PFT are made
on quota management documents.
1.15. Information Management. MAJCOMs may establish a training website to facilitate
information flow with the units. See unit training office or MAJCOM Supplement (if published)
for additional information. AMC hosts lead command training information and courseware
applicable to all C-130 units on the AMC/A3T Community of Practice (CoP) at
https://afkm.wpafb.af.mil/AMC_A3T and the AMC/A3TA CoP at
https://afkm.wpafb.af.mil/AMC_A3TA.
1.16. Failure to Progress or Complete Training. If a student fails to progress according to
syllabus or training requirements, the command accomplishing the training will conduct a
Progress Review (PR). The PR can recommend continuation in training or actions IAW AFI 11-
402, e.g. a Flying Evaluation Board (FEB). The formal school will notify the gaining unit of any
AFI 11-402 action taken. For students enrolled in the FTU formal instructor course, the PR may
recommend removal and return to unit via AF Form 126C to 19AF/CC in lieu of FEB action.
The ATS contractor will identify students who fail to progress according to ATS contract (see
Chapter 6).
1.17. Career Enlisted Aviator (CEA). CEA qualifications are not tied to AFI 36-2101,
Classifying Military Personnel (Officer and Enlisted), skill-level upgrade. All enlisted aircrew
qualifications are separate and distinct from skill level qualification. When an AF Form 8,
Certificate of Aircrew Qualification, is completed for the applicable flight evaluation, then that
crewmember is qualified to perform all duties assigned to that crew qualification regardless of
skill level. Aircrew instructor and flight examiner qualifications are also separate and distinct
from On-The-Job (OJT) trainer or certifier designation and are reflected in Air Force Specialty
Code (AFSC) by use of ―K‖ prefix (aircrew instructor) and ―Q‖ prefix (aircrew flight examiner).
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 19
Chapter 2
INITIAL QUALIFICATION TRAINING
2.1. General Requirements. AFI 11-202v1 defines initial qualification training. This chapter
specifies minimum training requirements for initial qualification, requalification, senior officer
courses, conversion, transition and difference training. The primary method of initial
qualification is to attend and complete the appropriate formal training course in the ETCA. When
attendance is not practical or a quota is not available, units will request a waiver to conduct in-
unit qualification training using formal school courseware.
2.2. Initial Qualification Training (IQT) Prerequisites: Complete initial qualification
training prerequisites in accordance with AFI 11-202v1, this publication, and the course syllabus.
2.3. Ground Training Requirements. Complete syllabus and ancillary ground training
requirements for initial qualification in accordance with AFI 11-202v1 and this instruction.
2.3.1. Table 2. 1 only includes ground training requirements that specifically apply to
aircrew. This AFI is not the directive authority for all ground training. Individuals are
responsible for completing additional ancillary ground training requirements as specified in
AFI 36-2201v1 and other applicable instructions.
2.3.2. Initial Qualification Ground Training Events. Students entered into formal
undergraduate and graduate training programs leading to aircrew qualification should
accomplish the events listed in Table 2.1 Students accomplish many of the events in Table
2.1 during undergraduate training prior to starting graduate training in C-130 formal courses.
The FTU will document events accomplished during formal school training in the
individual’s training record prior to graduation from the C-130 initial qualification course.
Gaining units will ensure all initial qualification events are completed prior to completing
mission certification. If in-unit initial or requalification training is accomplished in lieu of
formal school attendance, the unit is responsible for ensuring all requirements are completed.
2.3.2.1. Ground training events accomplished during formal training will use the course
completion date (successful evaluation date) to establish the due dates for all subsequent
currency and requirements. Completion of Initial Combat SERE Training (SS20), Initial
Water Survival Training (SS31), and initial aircrew flight equipment training during
formal school establishes the due date (based on date of first completed course) for
recurring Combat SERE (SS02), Conduct After Capture (SS03), Water Survival (SS05)
and Emergency Parachuting Training (SS06). Completion of Initial Combat SERE
Training (SS20) establishes the due date for recurring Law of Armed Conflict (G100).
2.3.2.2. Training missions may be flown before completing all items listed, provided
physiological training, physical, egress training, flight equipment familiarization training
and marshalling training are accomplished.
Table 2.1. Initial Qualification Ground Training Requirements.
Code Event Crew Position Notes
E030 Passport (Application; as required) All 2, 3
20 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
E035 Secondary Passport (Application; as required) All 2, 3
Flight Physical All 1, 5
Physiological Training All 1, 5
E112 Information Protection All
E113 Human Relations All
E114 Force Protection All
G002 Aircraft Marshalling Training and Examination All
G010 CBRNE Defense All 2, 3
G055 ENAF All 3
G060 Tactics All 2, 3
G070 Aircrew Intelligence All 2, 3
G080 Communications Procedures P, N 2, 3
G090 Anti-Hijacking All
G100 Law of Armed Conflict (LOAC) All
G120 ISOPREP Review All 2, 3
G130 Instrument Refresher Course (IRC) P, N
G150 Approach Plate Familiarization Course E
G182 Hazardous Cargo AC
G182A Hazardous Cargo L
G231 Initial Crew Resource Management (CRM) Training All
G280 Small Arms Training All
G281 Self Aid Buddy Care All
G310 Weather Avoidance Radar P, E
LL01 Aircrew Flight Equipment Familiarization Training All
LL03 Emergency Egress Training, Non-Ejection All 1
LL04 Aircrew Chemical Defense Equipment Training (ACDE) All 2, 3
LL05 Emergency Egress Training with ACDE All 2, 3
LL06 Aircrew Flight Equipment Training All 7
NV01 Initial NVG Training All 2, 3, 6
SS06 Emergency Parachute Training (EPT) All 2, 3
SS20 Combat SERE Training (S-V80-A) All
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 21
SS31 Water Survival Training, Parachuting (S-V86-A) All
VT01 VTRAT Initial Training All 2, 3, 4
NOTES:
1. Mandatory grounding item; individual will not fly until event is accomplished.
2. Not required for BAQ crewmembers (includes staff officers maintaining BAQ).
3. Not required for Senior Officer Course graduates.
4. All crewmembers will complete VT01; however, only affects mission ready status for units
co-located with a VTRAT device.
5. Flight Physical and Physiological Training are tracked on each crewmember’s Individual
Training Summary (ITS). There is no need to assign and track these training events in the
training module of ARMS. If units want to track in ARMS, use G005 and G006 per Chapter 7.
6. For crewmembers requiring NVG certification.
7. LL06 should be accomplished in conjunction with SS02, LL03, or SS05. See Chapter 7.
2.4. Flying Training Requirements. Complete flying training requirements for initial
qualification in accordance with the formal school syllabus, AFI 11-202v1, and this instruction.
2.5. Conversion, Transition and Difference Training.
2.5.1. Conversion Training. Conversion training requires completion of a formal school
initial qualification course. If converting an entire unit and adequate training quotas are not
available, qualified personnel from other units will normally provide the initial cadre. Units
will coordinate with their MAJCOM and AETC for in-unit training plans.
2.5.1.1. Form a nucleus of instructor and flight examiner personnel (initial cadre) to
begin aircrew conversion. Converting units may request initial cadre waiver of PAA time
requirement. Send waivers through appropriate MAJCOM channels and include the
information specified in paragraph 1.5. Additionally, include the most recent aircraft
flown and total time in that aircraft in the remarks section of the waiver.
2.5.1.2. Initial cadre will not be designated in a crew position higher than currently held,
e.g., C-17 mission pilot (MP) to C-130 evaluator pilot (EP) unless previously qualified in
the new aircraft.
2.5.1.3. If accomplishing in-unit training IAW AFI 11-202v1, units will publish a letter
identifying initial cadre of instructors and flight examiners by crew qualification.
2.5.2. Transition Training. Transition Training is a shortened version of initial qualification
training that gives aircrew members cross-flowing from another military aircraft credit for
acquired aviation proficiency. Transition between the C-130J, C-130 AMP and C-130E/H
will be accomplished using MAJCOM-approved training syllabi.
2.5.3. Difference Training. For this AFI, the C-130 MDS primary series focus includes the
C-130E, C-130H, C-130H1, C-130H2, and C-130H3. Units with unique requirements such
as WC-130H or LC-130H, will coordinate difference training requirements with their
MAJCOM/A3T. Units complete difference training to qualify crewmembers in a different
series C-130 aircraft. For purposes of determining continuation training requirements,
qualification in more than one series C-130E/H is not considered dual or multiple
qualifications. When mission ready (MR), basic aircraft qualification (BAQ), or basic
22 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
mission capable (BMC) crewmembers need to complete difference training for a C-130
having the same mission as their former C-130 series, there may be additional mission
qualification training depending on the crewmember’s experience and aircraft equipment.
Sq/CC will determine mission training required. Instructor and Flight Examiner
crewmembers converting from one series C-130 to another may remain instructors or flight
evaluators at the discretion of the gaining unit commander (or appropriate ARC Air
Operations Officer). Send recommendations through MAJCOM channels to HQ AMC/A3T
when additional difference training requirements are identified. Prior to flying, ensure the
minimum ground training requirements in paragraph 3.3.1 are met.
2.5.3.1. Pilot and Flight Engineer Difference Requirements. Units may conduct flying
training in an aircraft or Aircrew Training System simulator at the discretion of the unit
commander. Specific Difference Training courseware is available from 714 TRS.
2.5.3.1.1. Difference from C-130E to C-130H (Super E — see Attachment 1) and
vice versa. Complete academics and flying training.
2.5.3.1.2. Difference from C-130E, C-130H, C-130H2 or C-130H3 to C-130H1 and
vice versa. Complete academics and flying training. If units have C-130H and C-
130H1 aircraft, crewmembers currently qualified on C-130E aircraft need only
complete C-130E to C-130H1 difference training.
2.5.3.1.3. Difference from C-130E, C-130H, C-130H1 or C-130H3 to C-130H2 and
vice versa. Complete academics and flying training. Differences between C-130H2s
due to technical order modifications will be comprehensively briefed, but no flying is
required.
2.5.3.1.4. Difference from C-130E, C-130H, C-130H1, or C-130H2 to C-130H3 and
vice versa. Complete academics and flying training.
2.5.3.2. Navigator Requirements for Difference Training. The Sq/CC determines
academics and flight training requirements. The academic training will include
performance data and navigation equipment as a minimum. Flying training may be
conducted in a simulator with identical navigation equipment.
2.5.3.3. Loadmaster requirements for Difference Training. Training shall be determined
on an individual basis by the Sq/CC based upon the crewmember’s proficiency (hands-on
desired). As a minimum, conduct training on emergency equipment location and
operation. Airdrop-qualified loadmasters converting from MC-130P or HC-130H/P/N to
C-130E/H will attend Loadmaster Refresher Training (G602) in addition to difference
training.
2.5.3.4. Difference training between the C-130J, C-130 AMP and C-130E/H is not
applicable. Training between the C-130J, C-130 AMP and C-130E/H is transition
training.
2.6. Multiple Qualifications. MAJCOMs may authorize qualification in more than one MDS
aircraft for crewmembers only when such action is directed by command mission requirements
and is justifiable and in the best interests of the command. This authority cannot be delegated
below the MAJCOM level (see AFI 11-202v1). Crewmembers will attend a formal initial
qualification course for multiple qualifications in different MDS aircraft (e.g., C-130H and C-
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 23
17). Crewmembers will, at a minimum, maintain FTL A currency requirements in the C-130
(N/A for senior officers). Crewmembers will refer to the MDS-specific AFIs for training
requirements in the other aircraft. For units changing MDS aircraft, MAJCOMS may adjust
training requirements to align with numbers of assigned aircraft until the transition is complete.
2.7. Senior Officer Qualification Training Requirements. AFI 11-202v1 identifies senior
officer qualification requirements. See formal course syllabus for additional guidance.
2.7.1. Senior officer qualification is reserved for senior rated officer positions requiring
operational flying (Aircrew Position Indicator codes 6 and 8, see AFI 11-401). This includes
O-6 selects and above, and in some cases, O-5s permanently filling an O-6 position. Senior
officers will attend the Senior Officer Course (pilot or navigator). The SOC-A and SOC-B
courses result in a supervised status and basic aircraft qualification; these senior officers will
fly with an instructor and maintain FTL E continuation training requirements. Senior officers
who need to fly unsupervised, as determined by the OG/CC, may also complete the SOC-C
or an in-unit course of instruction leading to unsupervised qualification. The SOC-C provides
unsupervised basic aircraft qualification and the option for mission qualification. The host
OSS/OST office is responsible for recommending a formal training course for initial
qualification and mission qualification based on the senior officer’s flying experience and
familiarity with the weapon system. After OG/CC review, MAJCOM/A3T will approve the
proposed training plan prior to execution.
2.8. Flight Surgeons. Flight surgeons will complete items listed in Table 4.3 for initial
qualification.
2.9. Requalification Training. AFI 11-202v1 specifies requalification training limits and
requirements. See Attachment 3 for formal Aircrew Training System courses. The secondary
method of requalification is applicable if the formal course is required, but not practical, or
quotas are not available. Units will request a waiver from their parent MAJCOM. Unless
specified otherwise in AFI 11-202v1, a crewmember is unqualified upon expiration of the
qualification evaluation, loss of currency exceeding 6 months (for currency items specified in
Chapter 4), or completion of a qualification evaluation in a different MDS (EXCEPTION: When
authorized multiple qualifications).
2.9.1. AFI 11-202v1 requalification training limits and requirements also apply to loss of
mission qualification or certification as specified in paragraph 4.9.
2.9.2. For those events requiring certification but no recurring training such as Phoenix
Banner and HALO, loss of aircraft qualification due to expiration of the qualification
evaluation results in loss of those certifications. The Sq/CC will determine if training is
required to regain certification. The Sq/CC should consider items to include the amount of
time since expiration of aircraft qualification, crewmember's experience level, and any
changes to the event when determining what, if any, training is required. If training is
required, options could range from only ground training to the full syllabus for the
certification.
2.9.3. If in-unit requalification training is accomplished in lieu of formal school attendance,
the unit is responsible for ensuring all requirements in Table 2.1 have been previously
completed.
24 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Chapter 3
MISSION QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION TRAINING
3.1. Description. This chapter establishes minimum criteria and training requirements for
mission qualification and certification training. All crewmembers will complete initial
qualification prior to mission qualification training (MQT) and mission certification. Primary
method of mission qualification training is by attending the formal school and completing the
appropriate formal course syllabus. Except where specifically stated, units conducting training
may arrange mission sequence or sequence training events as necessary to use flying training
hours effectively and accomplish the training mission.
3.2. Time Periods for Mission Qualification and Certification Training. See Table 1.2 A
crewmember will be mission ready (MR) after completion of all ground training and flying
training requirements and certification by Sq/CC or Review and Certification (R& C) Board for
aircraft commander (AC) according to AFI 11-2C-130v2, C-130 Aircrew Evaluation Criteria.
3.2.1. Mobility Pilot Development (MPD) and Pilot Cross-Flow Graduates. Prior to aircraft
commander certification, a MR MPD or cross-flow graduate (see Attachment 3 for course
descriptions) will be designated as a MR pilot (FPH or FPL) for Status of Resources and
Training System (SORTS) and TRP purposes and may fly as a qualified pilot on any crew
including operational missions. MPD and pilot cross-flow graduates may not fly as a pilot-
in-command until certified as an aircraft commander.
3.2.2. Aircraft Commander Certification. Maximum time period for pilots completing an
aircraft commander qualification course (PRA/B) or MPD Pilot Check-Out Course (PCO) to
be certified as an aircraft commander is 90 days (120 days for PXA-C cross-flow graduates).
ARC units use 180 days and 240 days. If individuals are unable to complete certification
within these limits, their units will notify MAJCOM/A3T with a description of the difficulty
and expected certification date. The time period starts when the individual performs the first
event leading to aircraft commander certification following their return from the FTU course
or completion of the aircraft commander upgrade course or PCO Course if accomplished
locally.
3.2.3. ARMS Tracking. Pilots will initially be coded IAW Table 5.2 for ARMS tracking.
Newly assigned crewmembers who are initially qualifying or requalifying in the unit mission
will be counted as basic qualified (FP for pilots, FN for navigators, FF for flight engineers,
FL for loadmasters) for ARMS and TRP purposes. This is for ARMS tracking only and does
not affect the crewmember’s aircraft qualification on the AF Form 8. Upon completion of all
ground and flying training requirements, units will certify the crewmembers as mission ready
and change the ARMS codes to reflect mission qualified.
3.3. Ground Training Requirements. Complete all syllabus and ancillary ground training
events in Tables 2.1 and 3.1 before certification as mission ready. Training may be
accomplished concurrently with other training.
3.3.1. Training missions may be flown before completing all items listed in Tables 2.1 and
3.1, provided physiological training, flight physical, emergency egress training, aircrew flight
equipment familiarization training and marshalling training are accomplished.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 25
3.3.2. Ground training events accomplished during formal training will use the course
completion date (successful final evaluation date) to establish the due dates for all subsequent
currency and requirements. See paragraph 2.3.2.
3.3.3. Formal School OG/CCs, the Commandant USAF Weapons School (USAFWS), and
Commander Advanced Airlift Tactical Training Center (AATTC) may determine, obtain
MAJCOM approval, and publish ground training requirements for their units in local training
procedures.
Table 3.1. Mission Qualification Ground Training Requirements.
Code Event Crew Position Notes
G001 Unit Indoctrination Training All 1
G002 Aircraft Marshalling Training and Examination All 1
LL01 Aircrew Flight Equipment Familiarization Training All 1
M060 Theater Indoctrination Training All 2
SS01 Local Area Survival All 1
NOTES:
Previously certified and qualified mission ready crewmembers transferring between units or in a
cross-flow program (between flying units) only need any applicable events in which they have
lost currency.
1. Accomplish upon arrival after each permanent change of station. See event description in
Chapter 7.
2. Required for theater-assigned or deployed crewmembers as determined by Sq/CC. See event
description in Chapter 7 for additional details.
3.4. Flying Training Requirements.
3.4.1. After arrival at duty station all crewmembers will receive a local area briefing and
supervised local orientation flight (not applicable for in-unit initial, re-qualification or
upgrade training). The lack of a local briefing and local flight does not preclude the
crewmember from deploying as MR.
3.4.2. Newly assigned crewmembers who are initially qualifying or requalifying in the unit
mission will fly under the direct supervision of a like position instructor until completion of
Unit Indoctrination and difference training (as required). After completing all flying training
events and prior to completing all ground training events, Sq/CCs may allow crewmembers
to fly unsupervised on training flights provided the remaining ground training items do not
affect mission accomplishment for that flight.
3.4.3. Navigators. High altitude low opening (HALO) and high altitude high opening
(HAHO) aerial delivery are special certifications and are not required for MR status. See
paragraph 5.13.
3.4.4. Loadmasters. High winds or non-availability of parachutists may cause loadmasters
to complete the FTU mission qualification course without obtaining actual personnel airdrop
certification. In these cases, use standard airdrop training bundles (SATB) during flight
26 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
training. Actual personnel airdrop certification will be accomplished in-unit. Document the
substitution according to Attachment 2 and AFI 11-2C-130v2. Accomplish final
certification for personnel airdrop in-unit under the supervision of an instructor loadmaster or
flight examiner loadmaster on an actual static line personnel airdrop.
3.4.5. Assault Landing Training. Conduct assault takeoff and landing initial qualification
training on a landing zone (or painted landing zone) of 3,000 feet or longer. Maximum effort
takeoffs should be performed from the main runway when it is available (i.e., safe and
practical to taxi from an assault landing zone). Takeoffs from the assault zone are authorized
IAW AFI 11-2C-130v3 and during formal mission qualification training conducted either at
the formal school or via the secondary method.
3.4.6. Units North of the 60 Parallel. Crewmembers in units north of the 60 N parallel who
are scheduled to complete secondary method (in-unit) mission qualification training during
the period 1 April through 30 September, have until 30 September to complete the required
night training events, even if this exceeds the training time limitations in Table 1.2. The
mission qualification evaluation for these crewmembers may be administered before
completing night training events.
3.4.7. Joint Airborne and Air Transportability Training (JA/ATT) Missions. When
participating in JA/ATT missions, unqualified and non-current crewmembers may be utilized
in their respective crew positions provided they are supervised by an instructor or flight
examiner. Comply with direct supervision requirements of AFI 11-401 when carrying
passengers (including paratroopers).
3.4.8. AWADS Training. See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and AFI 11-2C-130v3 for additional
AWADS information. Accomplish training according to ATS courseware and local training
guides.
3.4.9. Formal School OG/CCs, the Commandant USAF Weapons School (USAFWS), and
Commander Advanced Airlift Tactical Training Center (AATTC) may determine, obtain
MAJCOM approval, and publish flying training requirements for their units in local training
procedures.
3.5. Aircraft Defensive Systems (ADS). ADS Training is not a separate certification, but all
aircrew will receive Aircraft Defensive System (ADS) training (applicable to the unit’s ADS
configuration) during Unit Indoctrination or difference training. Training will include ground and
flight training for all crewmembers. See AFTTP 3-3.C-130, Attachment 3 for unclassified
information on aircraft defensive systems. See AFTTP 3-1.C-130 for more in-depth classified
information on all C-130 defensive systems and defensive reactions. Training should be
conducted by a graduate of the USAF Weapons School, Mobility Electronic Combat Officers
Course (MECOC), or as designated by the unit commander.
3.5.1. Ground Training. Academic training will cover as a minimum, basic principles of
Infrared (IR) threats and flares, basic principles of radar and chaff (only applicable to unit’s
with a Radar Warning Receiver (RWR) on their aircraft), how ADS work, how to operate the
system, use of checklists, malfunctions, emergency procedures, and defensive maneuvers
during takeoff, low-level, medium/high altitude, airdrop and landing.
3.5.2. Flight Training. Flight training will cover preflight actions, aircraft walk-around,
system turn-on, system test and a flight profile that should include defensive maneuvers from
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 27
high/medium altitude, during a low-level, after slowdown and before a simulated airdrop,
and a simulated approach to landing. Calls for in-flight reactions (simulated ADS inputs or
simulated visual sightings) should come either directly from the instructor or as a result of
the instructor’s input to an aircrew member.
28 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Chapter 4
CONTINUATION TRAINING
4.1. Description. This chapter establishes the minimum flying and related ground training
requirements to maintain an assigned aircrew training status. The unit commander will ensure
each crewmember receives sufficient training to maintain individual proficiency.
4.2. Aircrew Status. Squadron commanders will assign C-130 crewmembers an aircrew status
using the following criteria:
4.2.1. Mission Ready. For SORTS, operational tasking, and deployments, a MR
crewmember is defined as one who is available and qualified in the unit’s mission
(completed mission certification for the applicable crew position).
4.2.2. Non-Mission Ready (NMR). A crewmember that is unqualified, non-current or
incomplete in required continuation training, or not certified to perform the unit mission. See
paragraph 4.9 for specific guidance on crewmembers who are non-current or incomplete in
required continuation training.
4.2.3. Basic Mission Capable (BMC). A crewmember who has satisfactorily completed
mission qualification training, is qualified in some aspect of the unit mission, but does not
maintain MR status. The crewmember maintains familiarization in the command or unit’s
operational mission. Includes crewmembers assigned to MAJCOM, NAF and other line and
non-line units.
4.2.3.1. The crewmember shall be able to attain full unit mission certification to meet
operational taskings within 45 days.
4.2.3.2. The OG/CC may define a portion of the unit’s operational mission and declare
an assigned or attached crewmember Mission Ready if all training requirements for that
part of the operational mission are met. The crewmember does not need to attain full
mission certification unless directed by the OG/CC.
4.2.3.3. Formal School BMC crewmembers are qualified to conduct all aspects of the
formal training mission. Formal school instructors will be qualified and certified in the
training/unit mission before performing instructor duties. Formal school crewmembers
may fly other than training missions, but they will comply with any MR requirements
required for that mission.
4.2.3.4. BMC crewmembers may log instructor or evaluator time for the portion of the
mission for which they are current and qualified. See AFI 11-401 for additional
information on logging instructor time.
4.2.4. Basic Aircraft Qualification (BAQ). Aircrew may be designated BAQ after
completion of C-130 qualification training (initial or requalification).
4.2.5. MR, BMC, and BAQ crewmembers will accomplish and/or maintain the requirements
in AFI 11-202v1 (for their respective status) and the appropriate events in the ground and
semi-annual flying continuation tables in this AFI.
4.3. Flying Training Levels (FTL).
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 29
4.3.1. The Sq/CC determines the FTL before each semi-annual period. Assign new unit
crewmembers a FTL during in-processing. Base FTL on experience and aircraft proficiency.
Crewmembers may have a different FTL for different flying qualifications, (i.e. a
crewmember may be a FTL A – aircraft commander, but a FTL C – airdrop copilot).
4.3.1.1. FTL A Highly Experienced Crewmembers. Sq/CC may assign highly
experienced MR line crewmembers to this level. In addition, this may include MR or
NMR MAJCOM headquarters, 618 TACC personnel, AETC instructors, NAF personnel,
USAF Expeditionary Center (EC) instructors, USAFWS instructors, AATTC instructors,
wing, OG, and Sq/CCs, Sq/DOs, personnel assigned to OG evaluation positions, and any
instructors assigned primarily to staff duties. NOTE: NMR crewmembers assigned to
MAJCOM headquarters, NAF, Expeditionary Mobility Task Force (EMTF), 618 TACC,
USAF Expeditionary Center (EC), Contingency Response Group (CRG), Air Mobility
Operations Group (AMOG), FTU, or direct reporting unit may be categorized as BMC
and assigned to FTL A. These individuals may fly unsupervised on any mission provided
they are current and qualified for that mission.
4.3.1.2. FTL B Experienced MR Crewmember.
4.3.1.3. FTL C MR Crewmember. MPD pilots, cross-flow pilots, and copilots should
initially be assigned to FTL C. If desired, Sq/CCs may assign highly proficient MPD
pilots, cross-flow pilots and copilots to FTL A or FTL B. Also assigned to individuals
pursuing MR status after initial qualification training.
4.3.1.4. FTL D No longer used.
4.3.1.5. FTL E—BAQ or BMC non-instructor staff. May include senior officers,
MAJCOM, NAF, EMTF and 618 TACC staff who are not maintaining MR or instructor
status. FTL E requirements are insufficient for MR status and crewmembers assigned to
this FTL will fly with an instructor of like specialty at all times. For pilots, an instructor
will be at a set of controls during critical phases of flight. In addition, FTL E pilots will
be current in takeoffs, landings, and instrument approaches before carrying passengers.
4.3.2. Change of FTL. Once the semi-annual period begins, do not move a crewmember to a
level requiring fewer events. Place BAQ or BMC crewmembers into a different FTL any
time after attaining MR status. Prorate events upon changing training levels.
4.4. Training Events/Tables. Standardized ARMS training event identifiers and description
are located in Chapter 7. Designate unit defined events as ―X‖ event (i.e. X020). Units will
include a description in their local training procedures.
4.4.1. Crediting Event Accomplishment. Credit events accomplished on training, operational
missions and satisfactory evaluations or certifications toward flying requirements and
establish a subsequent due date. Use date of successful evaluation as the date of
accomplishment for all ground training events that were trained during a formal course. For
flying training events, a successful flight evaluation establishes a new current and qualified
reference date for all flying events required during the semi-annual period. See AFI 11-2C-
130v2 for specific evaluation details. For flying training during upgrade training, numbers of
events accomplished prior to the evaluation are credited to the requirements for the current
crew position. For flying training during initial qualification or requalification training,
numbers of events accomplished prior to the evaluation are not credited to any crew position.
30 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
In all cases, numbers of events successfully accomplished on the evaluation or certification
are credited toward the new crew position.
4.4.1.1. Units may develop local mission accomplishment reports and/or training
accomplishment reports to document continuation training for processing into ARMS.
See AFI 11-202v1 for additional guidance.
4.4.2. For a flight evaluation graded Q-3, do not log continuation training requirements for
those events graded unsatisfactory (according to AFI 11-2C-130v2) until re-qualified. The
unit commander will determine which events will be allowed for credit based on AF Form 8
evaluation description.
4.4.3. Make-up training (ground or flying) is creditable towards the new training period.
4.4.4. Instructor and flight examiner training requirements and responsibilities. Instructors
and flight examiners may credit 50 percent of their total requirements while instructing or
evaluating. EXCEPTION: Instructor and flight examiner pilots may not credit any takeoffs or
landings flown by another pilot.
4.4.5. Crewmembers should see event descriptions in Chapter 7 for additional details on
crediting specific events.
4.4.6. Formal School OG/CCs, the Commandant USAFWS, and Commander AATTC may
determine, obtain MAJCOM approval, and publish ground and flying continuation training
requirements for their units in local training procedures.
4.4.7. Documenting Aircrew Training.
4.4.7.1. All training events will be recorded in ARMS.
4.4.7.1.1. Training events conducted during block training or phase training may be
consolidated under one ARMS entry.
4.4.7.1.2. Combined training events may have only one ARMS entry.
4.4.7.1.3. Input all one-time events and events required for permanent change-of-
station (PCS) in the ARMS database. Units may maintain one-time events on the
crewmember’s currency report.
4.4.7.2. See Attachment 2 for additional requirements.
4.5. Continuation Training Requirements.
4.5.1. Completion and tracking of continuation training is ultimately the responsibility of the
individual crewmember. Crewmembers should actively work with unit schedulers and
training offices to ensure their continuation training is accomplished as described in this
chapter.
4.5.2. Ground Training Events. Crewmembers will comply with requirements of Tables 4.1
and 4.2.
4.5.2.1. Failure to accomplish events in Table 4.1 leads to non-mission ready status. See
paragraph 4.9 for regaining mission ready status.
4.5.2.2. Failure to complete mobility training requirements in Table 4.2 does not lead to
non-mission ready status but may restrict crewmember from certain missions.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 31
4.5.2.3. Crewmembers (i.e., NAF, MAJCOM, USAF EC, etc.) attached to units may
accomplish ground training events at locations other than their unit of attachment. The
crewmember is responsible for reporting accomplished training events to their unit of
attachment (ARMS office).
4.5.2.4. Crewmembers performing extended alert duty (more than 24 hours) may
accomplish ground training that does not degrade required response time or mission
accomplishment. Specify additional requirements and or restrictions in MAJCOM
supplement or local training procedures.
4.5.2.5. Flight Surgeons use requirements in Table 4.3.
Table 4.1. Ground Continuation Training Requirements.
Code Event Position Frequency Notes
Flight Physical All A 1, 10
Physiological Training All 60m 1, 10
G060 Tactics All S 4, 5, 6, 8
G070 Aircrew Intelligence All A 4, 5, 8, 10
G080 Communications Procedures P, N 365d 4, 5, 7, 10
G090 Anti-hijacking All T 4, 8, 10
G130 Instrument Refresher Course P, N See Note 2 2, 10
G150 Approach Plate Familiarization Course E B 8
G182 Hazardous Cargo Training AC T 4, 5, 8, 10
G182A Hazardous Cargo Training L 24m 8, 10
G220 Flight Engineer Systems Refresher E A 3, 8
G230 CRM Refresher All A 8, 10, 11
G602 Loadmaster Refresher Training L A 3, 5, 8
LL03 Egress Training, Non-Ejection All T 1, 10
LL06 Aircrew Flight Equipment All A/R 8, 9, 10
NV03 NVG Ground Refresher Training All A 8, 10
SS02 Combat SERE Training All 36m 4, 5, 8
SS05 Water Survival Training All 36m 4, 8
SS06 Emergency Parachuting Training (EPT) All 36m 4, 5, 8
A-Annual, B-Biennial, S-Semi-Annual, T-Triennial, m-due in number of months, d-due in
number of days, A/R-As required
NOTES:
32 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
1. Mandatory grounding item on expiration date; individual will not fly until required training is
accomplished. Flight physical expires on the last day of the birth month. Flight physical and
physiological training are independently tracked via the crewmember’s Individual Training
Summary (ITS) and thus do not require an ARMS code. If units want to track in ARMS, use
G005 and G006 per Chapter 7.
2. Log IRC upon completion of the complete course to include instructor-led Hot Topics. Pilots
on active flying status will complete the IRC every fourth quarter after completion IAW
AFMAN 11-210, Instrument Refresher Course (IRC) Program.
3. Wing level and below. G220 incorporates hostile environment repair and G602 incorporates
Loadmaster Aerial Delivery (LAD).
4. Not required for Senior Officer Course graduates.
5. Not required for BAQ or BMC crewmembers.
6. Units should conduct tactics training semiannually with emphasis on current tactics changes
and techniques. OG/CCs may specify an alternate frequency for Tactics Training, but not less
than annual, provided unit crewmembers receive all G060 blocks of training annually.
7. OG/CCs may approve an extension of up to six months for aircrews.
8. The OG/CC is the waiver authority for this event. See paragraph 4.9.3.4.
9. Aircrew Flight Equipment Training (LL06) should be accomplished in conjunction with SS02,
LL03 and SS05. See event description in Chapter 7.
10. AFI 11-2C-130v1 is not the governing directive for completion of this event. IAW AFI 11-
202v1, Paragraph 6, refer to HQ AF/A3O-AT reference publications for current ancillary
training frequencies.
11. Crewmembers completing refresher simulator can take credit for G230, CRM Refresher.
Table 4.2. Mobility Training Requirements.
Code Event Position Frequency Notes
C040 Mobility Folder Review All A/R 1, 2, 3, 5
E030 Passport All A/R
E035 Secondary Passport All A/R
G120 ISOPREP Review All 180d 1, 2
G280 Small Arms Training All 24m 2, 6
LL04 Aircrew Chemical Defense
Training All B 1, 2, 5
SS03 Conduct After Capture (CAC) All 36m
SS07 Contingency SERE Indoctrination All A/R
VT03 VTRAT Refresher Training All A 1, 2, 5, 7
A-Annual, B-Biennial, T-Triennial, A/R-As required, m-due in number of months,
d-due in number of days
NOTES:
1. Not required for BAQ or BMC crewmembers.
2. Not required for Senior Officer Course graduates.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 33
3. As required for unit mission
4. See ETCA website https://etca.randolph.af.mil for event frequency requirements
5. The OG/CC is the waiver authority for this event. See paragraph 4.9.3.4.
6. AFRC and ANG crewmembers will comply with AFI 36-2226 requirements.
7. VT03 is mandatory only for units co-located with a VTRAT device.
Table 4.3. Flight Surgeon Ground Continuation Training Requirements.
Code Event Frequency Notes
Flight Physical A 1
Physiological Training 60m 1
E030 Passport A/R 2
G120 ISOPREP Review A/R 2
G231 CRM (One-time event in primary assigned aircraft) One-time 3
LL01 Aircrew Flight Equipment Familiarization Training One-time
LL03 Egress Training, Non-Ejection B 1
LL04 Aircrew Chemical Defense Training B 2, 4
LL05 Egress Training, w/ACDE One-time 2
SS02 Combat SERE Training (CST) 36m 2, 4
SS03 Conduct After Capture 36m 2, 4
SS05 Water Survival Training 36m 2, 4
SS06 Emergency Parachute Training 36m 2, 4
A-Annual, B-Biennial, QQ- 5 Years, T-Triennial, A/R-As required, m-Due in number of months
NOTES:
1. Mandatory grounding item. Flight physical and physiological training are independently
tracked via the crewmember’s Individual Training Summary (ITS) and thus do not require an
ARMS code. If units want to track in ARMS, use G005 and G006 per Chapter 7.
2. Required if on mobility status. Accomplish training prior to deployment to region requiring
event. If event is designated as one-time, accomplish prior to first deployment.
3. One-time event in primary assigned aircraft unless performing AE duties
4. OG/CC is waiver authority for this event
4.5.3. Flying Continuation Training Requirements. Tables 4.4 and 4.5 list flying
continuation training requirements. See Chapter 7 for event descriptions.
4.5.3.1. Dual-Seat Qualification. The following defines the allowed cockpit seat
assignment depending on crew training and qualification. AFI 11-2C-130v3 further
defines C-130 takeoff and landing policy for C-130 pilots.
34 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
4.5.3.1.1. Copilot (FPC). Once designated as an Aircraft Commander Candidate,
copilots may fly from the left seat and perform all flight maneuvers authorized for an
aircraft commander when under the direct supervision of an IP.
4.5.3.1.2. MPD Graduate (FPH). For basic proficiency events, MPD pilots may
accomplish pilot-flying/pilot-monitoring events in either seat with an aircraft
commander in the other seat. For mission events other than assault events, MPD
pilots may accomplish pilot-flying/pilot-monitoring duties in the right seat with an
aircraft commander in the left seat. For assault events, MPD pilots are restricted to
right-seat pilot-monitoring duties with an aircraft commander in the left seat. MPD
pilots will not perform left-seat pilot-flying mission/tactical events until entered into
PCO training. If mission requirements dictate, MPD pilots may perform left-seat
pilot-monitoring duties for mission/tactical events other than assault events.
4.5.3.1.3. Aircraft Commander Course Graduates (FPL). Prior to certification,
graduates of an aircraft commander course (aircraft commander upgrade or cross-
flow from another weapon system) can only accomplish pilot-flying assault landings
and takeoffs when under direct instructor supervision. These pilots may accomplish
other pilot-flying/pilot-monitoring events in either seat with an aircraft commander in
the other seat.
4.5.3.1.4. Aircraft Commanders. Aircraft commanders may not accomplish right-
seat pilot-flying assault events unless under direct IP supervision. Aircraft
commanders may fly in the right seat and supervise MPD pilots for proficiency/basic
events. Aircraft commanders may perform pilot-flying mission events in the right
seat with a MPD pilot in the left seat.
4.5.3.1.5. IPs may accomplish pilot-flying events in either seat with any pilot in the
other seat.
4.5.3.2. Simulator Credit for Training Requirements. Crewmembers may credit flight
training events in the simulator per Table 4.4 and Table 4.5. For ARMS tracking,
simulator events will be coded with a S prefix, or within ARMS use the Restrictions tab
under Profile Task Information.
4.5.3.3. Continuation Training Flying. Each MAJCOM provides flying hours to each
wing as training, test, and ferry hours or operations and maintenance (O & M) hours. The
hours, based on Aircraft Commander FTL C, are designed to provide all crew positions
with sufficient hours to accomplish all continuation flying training requirements.
4.5.3.4. Units North of the 60 Parallel. OG/CCs are authorized to waive all night
continuation training events (including currency events) from 1 April through 30
September. Training events will be prorated for each semi-annual period (see paragraph
4.8).
4.5.3.4.1. Any crewmember who is current for night training events as of 1 April will
remain current through 31 October. Any crewmember non-current for these events
prior to 1 April will remain non-current until accomplishing the event with an
instructor.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 35
4.5.3.5. Multiple Series C-130 Certifications. Pilots and flight engineers having multiple
certifications that only require difference training (i.e., C-130E and C-130H3) will have a
quarterly sortie currency in each aircraft. Use appropriate ARMS codes in Chapter 7
(M130, M131, M132, M133, M134). These codes are optional if maintaining a single
certification. The total FTL requirements for their applicable qualification-level
semiannual continuation flying training requirements may be accomplished in any C-
130E/H they are certified to fly. Loss of the quarterly currency requires a sortie in the
respective series aircraft with an instructor. EXCEPTIONS: For all crewmembers, C-
130H and C-130H1 are considered the same series and only require initial difference
training. C-130E and C-130H are also considered the same series and only require initial
difference training. Sq/CC will determine currency requirements for navigators and
loadmasters based on aircraft equipment. If there is little or no difference between
aircraft, Sq/CCs may allow navigators and loadmasters to maintain certification in both
aircraft without quarterly currency sorties in each aircraft.
Table 4.4. Pilot and Navigator Semi-Annual Continuation Flying Requirements.
Code Event Aircraft
Commander
MPD Pilot /
Copilot Navigator Notes
Proficiency/Basic Events A B C E CUR A B C CUR A B C E CUR
M010 Proficiency Sortie 1 1 1 1 2 2 4 6 6 3 45d 1, 9, 13,
14
G250 Refresher Simulator 15
G600 Navigator Refresher Training 15
P020 Takeoff 8 10 12 6 M 8 10 12 M 1, 9
P028 Right-Seat Takeoff 2 3 3 Q 3, 9
P029 Left-Seat Takeoff 2 3 3 Q 3, 9
NV47 NVG Takeoff 2 4 6 2 2 2 8
P190 Landing 8 10 12 6 M 8 10 12 M 1, 9
P198 Right-Seat Landing 2 3 3 Q 3, 9
P199 Left-Seat Landing 2 3 3 Q 3, 9
P192 Unaided Night Landing 2 2 2 Q 2 2 2 Q 5, 9, 11
NV48 NVG Landing 2 4 6 Q 2 2 2 Q 5, 8
P070 Instrument Approach 6 8 12 6 M 6 8 12 M 1, 9
NV80 NVG Instrument Approach 1 1 2 1 1 2 9
P100 Precision 3 4 6 2 3 4 6 9
P110 Non-precision 3 4 6 1 3 4 6 9
P116 NDB / VOR 1 1 1 1 1 1 9
P130 Circling 1 2 2 1 2 2 9
B014 Category I Navigation Sortie 2, 7, 12
GD09 Grid 2, 7, 12
NV05 NVG Airland Event 2 4 6 7
36 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
N120 Airborne Radar Approach (ARA) 2 2 4 7, 9
Assault Events A B C E CUR A B C CUR A B C E CUR
AS09 Assault Takeoff 6 8 10 2 4 4 8
AS11 Assault Landing 8 10 12 Q 2 4 4 8
AS12 Unaided Night Assault Landing 1 1 2 1 1 2 8
AS21 Heavyweight Assault Landing 2 2 4 8
NV50 NVG Assault Takeoff 1 2 2 1 2 2 8
NV49 NVG Assault Landing 2 2 4 Q 1 2 2 5, 8
Arrival/Departure Events A B C E CUR A B C CUR A B C E CUR
RS06 High-Altitude Arrival 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
RS16 Low-Altitude Arrival 1 3 3 1 3 3 1 3 3 7
RS26 High-Altitude Departure 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
RS36 Low-Altitude Departure 1 3 3 1 3 3 1 3 3 7
RS46 Penetration/Rapid Descent 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
Visual Low-Level (VLL) Events A B C E CUR A B C CUR A B C E CUR
VL01 VLL Day Event 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 7
VL11 VLL Formation Day Event 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
VL21 VLL Formation Lead Event 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
VL30 High to Low Alt Transition 2, 7
NV00 VLL NVG Event 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 7
NV08 VLL NVG Formation Event 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 7
SKE Events A B C E CUR A B C CUR A B C E CUR
SK00 SKE / IMC Event 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 7
SK07 SKE Formation Event 1 2 4 1 3 5 1 2 4 7
SK17 SKE Lead Event 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 7
Airdrop Events A B C E CUR A B C CUR A B C E CUR
AD03 Equipment Airdrop 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 6, 7
AD04 CDS Airdrop 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 6, 7
AD05 Personnel Airdrop 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 4, 6, 7
AD06 Visual Airdrop 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 7
AD07 SKE Airdrop 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 7
AD08 AWADS Airdrop 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 7
NV18 NVG Airdrop 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 7
AD09 Medium/High Altitude Airdrop 2, 7
AD10 PADS Airdrop 2, 7, 16
AD11 PADS Operator (Unguided) 1 1 2 1 1 2 7, 16
AD12 PADS Operator (Guided) 2, 16
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 37
Formation Departure/Recovery
Events A B C E CUR A B C CUR A B C E CUR
FR06 Formation Visual Departure 2 2 3 2 2 3 7
FR16 Formation Visual Recovery 2 2 3 2 2 3 7
FR26 SKE Departure 2 2 3 2 2 3 7
FR36 SKE Recovery 2 2 3 2 2 3 7
Miscellaneous Events A B C E CUR A B C CUR A B C E CUR
FE09 Optical Threat Event 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 7
FE19 IR Threat Event 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 7
FE29 Radar Threat Event 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 7
P260 Have Quick Event 1 2 2 1 2 2 7
P270 Secure Voice Event 1 2 2 1 2 2 7
P280 ACDTQT 7, 10
M-monthly, Q-quarterly, d-due in number of days.
NOTES: 1. Unqualified in the aircraft if non-current in excess of 6 months.
2. One event due annually. Not required for FTL E crewmembers.
3. MPD pilots only. See paragraph 4.5.3.1 for further discussion of left-seat and right-seat
flying.
4. Navigators require one actual airdrop annually; during the other 6-month period, they may
credit a SATB personnel drop. Use AD05A for actual personnel.
5. PACAF assigned and gained units in Alaska may substitute ―180d‖ for ―Q‖ for P192, NV48,
NV49 and any future night currency events. See paragraph 4.5.3.6.
6. Airdrop event; SATB or actual for pilots; Actual drop for navigators (exception: personnel
airdrop, see note 4).
7. May log 50% (Rounded up; 100% if requirement is 1) in any USAF-certified WST (does not
have to be Level C or better). See paragraph 4.5.3.2 for ARMS tracking guidance.
Crewmembers can maintain and regain currency for any event that may be 100% accomplished
in the simulator. Navigators may credit Proficiency/Basic Events in the Satellite Navigation
Station or WST. Navigators may credit all other events in the WST.
8. May log 50% (Rounded up; 100% if requirement is 1) in a Level C or better WST or Satellite
Navigation Station. See paragraph 4.5.3.2 for ARMS tracking guidance. Crewmembers can
maintain and regain currency for any event that may be 100% accomplished in the simulator.
9. May log 100% in a Level C or better WST or Satellite Navigation Station. See paragraph
4.5.3.2 for ARMS tracking guidance. Crewmembers can maintain and regain currency in the
simulator.
10. P280 is Triennial for FTL A, Biennial for FTL B, and Annual for FTL C. Not required for
FTL E crewmembers.
11. USAFE pilots: Unaided Night Landing – 180-day currency.
12. Training requirement determined by MAJCOM/A3
13. Navigators may maintain and regain currency in any WST or Satellite Navigation Station.
For navigators, Note 7 also applies to this event.
14. MAJCOM and NAF navigators require one proficiency sortie every 90 days. For all
navigators, currency will expire at the end of the calendar month.
38 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
15. One event due annually. OG/CC is waiver authority.
16. JPADS certified crewmembers only.
Table 4.5. Engineer and Loadmaster Semi-Annual Continuation Flying Requirements.
Code Event Flight Engineer Loadmaster Notes
Basic/Proficiency Events A B C CUR A B C CUR
G250 Refresher Simulator 2
M010 Proficiency Sortie 4 6 6 45d 4 6 6 45d 1, 6
M050 Tactical Mission 3 4 6 3 4 6 6
Arrival/Departure Events A B C CUR A B C CUR
RS46 Penetration/Rapid Descent 1 1 1 6
Airdrop Events A B C CUR A B C CUR
AD01 Basic Airdrop Event 3 3 3 6
AD03 Equipment 1 2 4, 5
AD04 CDS 1 2 4, 5
AD05A Personnel 1 1 3, 4, 5
AD09 Medium/High Altitude Airdrop 2, 6
AD10 PADS Airdrop 2, 8
Miscellaneous Events A B C CUR A B C CUR
FE09 Optical Threat Event 2, 6
FE19 IR Threat Event 2, 6
FE29 Radar Threat Event 2, 6
P280 ACDTQT 6, 7
NVG Events A B C CUR A B C CUR
NV02 NVG Event 1 1 2 1 2 4, 6
NV05 NVG Airland Event 2 2 4 6
Q-Quarterly, d-due in listed number of days.
NOTES: 1. MAJCOM and NAF engineers and loadmasters require one proficiency sortie every 90 days.
For all crewmembers, currency will expire at the end of the calendar month. Unqualified in the
aircraft if non-current in excess of 6 months.
2. One event due annually. OG/CC is waiver authority.
3. ARC loadmasters require only one annually. For personnel airdrop, ARC loadmasters
disregard Note 4.
4. If FTL A block is blank, training requirement is one event due annually.
5. Actual load required (not SATB). Loadmasters log AD05A for Personnel Airdrop.
6. Flight Engineers may log 50% (Rounded up; 100% if requirement is 1) in any USAF-
certified WST (does not have to be Level C or better). See paragraph 4.5.3.2 for ARMS tracking
guidance. Flight Engineers can maintain and regain currency in the simulator.
7. P280 is Triennial for FTL A, Biennial for FTL B, and Annual for FTL C.
8. JPADS certified crewmembers only.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 39
4.6. Flight Surgeon Continuation Training Flying Requirements. Flight Surgeons will
comply with the requirements of this volume and AFI 11-202v1. Flight surgeons require one
sortie in any qualified MDS every 60 days. See AFI 11-202v1 for flying continuation training
requirements. See Table 4.3 for flight surgeon ground continuation training requirements.
4.6.1. Flight Surgeon loss of flying currency. Units will notify the MAJCOM Command
Surgeon.
4.6.1.1. Flight Surgeons that exceed 60 days (but less than 180 days) between sorties
require completion of emergency egress training (non-ejection) with an aircrew instructor
prior to the next flight.
4.6.1.2. Flight Surgeons that exceed 180 days between sorties require completion of
emergency egress training (non-ejection) with a certified aircrew instructor prior to the
next flight and completion of the online Flight Surgeon Qualification Exam
(https://afiadl.mont.disa.mil).
4.7. Additional Ancillary Training. Ancillary Training is any guidance or instruction that
contributes to mission accomplishment, but is separate from an Air Force Specialty or
occupational series. Some ancillary training does not impact mission ready status or mobility
status. AFI 11-2C-130v1 is not the governing directive for completion of ancillary training
events. Individuals are responsible for completing additional ancillary ground training
requirements as specified in applicable instructions. In accordance with AFI 11-202v1, the
source AFI provides training frequency for these events unless an approved waiver has been
authorized. See Unit Deployment Manager to ensure compliance with additional non-aircrew
specific training requirements.
4.8. Proration of Training. AFI 11-202v1 describes proration of training requirements for
crewmembers not available for flying duties. In addition, prorate training for non-availability due
to contingency alerts and contingency flying temporary duty (TDY) when the contingency
precludes training for certain mission events (PACAF and USAFE: also contingency operations
from home station). This authority will be used judiciously, especially when prorating the same
crewmember for consecutive semi-annual training periods.
4.8.1. Use this formula to determine training requirements: number of months available
times the event volume divided by the number of months in the training period. Round down
to the nearest whole number, but not less than 1 (e.g. 5.6 rounds to 5).
4.8.1.1. Use Table 4.6 to determine the number of months available. Prorate only if
absence is at least 15 cumulative days.
4.8.1.2. When an individual permanently changes station (PCS) during the training cycle
to a unit flying the same MDS aircraft and enters the same FTL or lower, credit training
accomplished at the previous base. Prorate training requirements based on the time
available (e.g., time at former base, plus time at new base, minus number of days not
available) during the training period. Time available starts 7-days after sign-in for
Continental United States (CONUS) and 14-days after sign-in for Outside the Continental
United States (OCONUS) or on the date of actual accomplishment of the first training
event, whichever occurs first. Subtract previous accomplishments from the prorated total
to determine remaining requirements.
40 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
4.8.2. Units may also prorate requirements for individuals changing training levels. If
requirements are prorated do not credit events accomplished while in the former FTL.
Table 4.6. Individual Availability.
Days Available Months Available
0-15 0
16-45 1
46-75 2
76-105 3
106-135 4
136-165 5
>166 6
4.9. Failure to Complete Training Requirements. Declare individuals NMR if they fail to
maintain flying currency, fail to complete semi-annual flying continuation training requirements,
or fail to complete ground continuation training requirements. The following guidance applies:
4.9.1. Loss of Currency. Flight currency is associated with those events denoted in the flying
continuation training tables accomplished in a specific period of time (monthly, quarterly,
semi-annual, or annual as listed in the ―CUR‖ column). Loss of currency prohibits an
individual from accomplishing unsupervised in-flight duties in the non-current event(s).
4.9.1.1. Place individuals delinquent in one or more currency events in a NMR training
status and ensure they are supervised by an instructor when performing those events for
which they are non-current.
4.9.1.2. Crewmembers are non-current the day after event currency expires (i.e., a
crewmember that accomplished an event with monthly currency on 1 May becomes non-
current on 1 July).
4.9.1.3. Sq/CC will direct training necessary for the individual to regain MR status or
request an OG/CC waiver for the requirement. Base the decision to approve a waiver on
the individual crewmember’s experience and proficiency level. Do not approve a waiver
request for the same flying training event deficiency affecting consecutive training
periods (if a waiver is desired for consecutive training periods, forward request for
MAJCOM approval).
4.9.2. Failure to Complete Semi-annual Flying Training Events. At the end of each training
period, the Sq/CC will review ARMS products for crewmembers that fail to accomplish all
flying continuation training requirements. Failure to complete semi-annual requirements
prohibits an individual from accomplishing unsupervised in-flight duties in the specific
event(s).
4.9.2.1. Place individuals delinquent in one or more events in a NMR training status and
ensure they are supervised by an instructor when performing those events for which they
are delinquent.
4.9.2.2. Sq/CC will direct training necessary for the individual to regain MR status using
the same process as regaining currency or request an OG/CC waiver for the requirement.
Base the decision to approve a waiver on the individual crewmember’s experience and
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 41
proficiency level. Do not approve a waiver request for the same flying training event
deficiency affecting consecutive training periods (if a waiver is desired for consecutive
training periods, forward request for MAJCOM approval).
4.9.3. Failure to Complete Ground Training Events.
4.9.3.1. Failure to complete Ground Continuation training events in Table 4.1 leads to
NMR status.
4.9.3.2. Failure to complete mobility training requirements in Table 4.2 does not lead to
non-mission ready status but may restrict crewmember from certain missions..
4.9.3.3. If a Flight Surgeon fails to complete Ground Continuation Training events in
Table 4.3, the Sq/CC (or his designated representative) will determine the Flight
Surgeon’s status based on mission requirements.
4.9.3.4. The OG/CC may waive some ground continuation training events as identified
in Tables 4.1 and 4.2. This waiver extends the due date and does not delete the
requirement. This waiver authority will be used judiciously. The decision to grant a
waiver will be based on the individual crewmember’s experience and proficiency level.
OG/CC will determine the allowable time period of the waiver. The make-up training
should be accomplished at the earliest opportunity. This waiver is for unforeseen
circumstances only and only for events that will not degrade mission accomplishment.
4.9.3.5. With the exception of mandatory grounding items, Sq/CC (or their designated
representative) may allow crewmembers NMR for events in Table 4.1 or Table 4.2 to fly
unsupervised on training missions as long as the crewmembers do not accomplish the
specific event(s) that put them into NMR status. An individual NMR for failure to
complete NVG Ground Refresher Training (NV03) may fly unsupervised on any mission
not requiring the overdue event with Sq/CC (or designated representative) approval. An
individual NMR for failure to complete Hazardous Cargo Training (G182) may only fly
unsupervised on local training missions not requiring the overdue event with Sq/CC (or
their designated representative) approval.
Table 4.7. NMR Flying Restrictions.
NMR DUE TO RESULT
Proficiency / Basic events (Note 1) Instructor supervision required
Assault events (w/o NVGs) Restricted from assault takeoffs / landings
Visual Low-Level day events (Note 2) Restricted from Visual Low-Level day events
SKE formation events (Note 2) Restricted from SKE formation events
NVG airland (to include NVG takeoff, NVG
landing, NVG Instrument Approaches)
Restricted from NVG airland operations
NVG airdrop (Note 3, 4) Restricted from NVG airdrop
NVG assault events Restricted from NVG assault events
NVG VLL event (Note 3) Restricted from NVG VLL event
NVG ground operation events (loadmaster) Restricted from NVG ground operations
Airdrop events (Note 4) Restricted from airdrop events
42 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Arrival and departure events Restricted from arrivals and departures
Miscellaneous events (see Tables 4.4 & 4.5) Restricted from miscellaneous events
NOTES:
1. Includes all Proficiency/Basic events listed in Tables 4.4 and 4.5. See NVG items for NVG
restrictions. (Example: NMR due to landing requires instructor supervision for any landing.
NMR due to NVG Landing restricts NVG landings but does not affect unaided landings). Only
includes Category 1 Navigation Sortie or Grid Navigation if planned for the mission. If not
planned, crewmembers are restricted from performing those events, but they may fly without
instructor supervision. Pilots NMR due to unaided night events may fly unsupervised on local
training day missions as long as they are MR for corresponding day events planned for the
mission. If a MPD pilot is NMR due to left-seat events, he/she may continue to perform right-
seat duties without restriction as long as he/she is current in required right-seat events. If a flight
engineer or loadmaster is NMR due to M050, Tactical Mission, the crewmember may still fly a
Proficiency Sortie as long as no mission events requiring a tactical checklist are planned or
flown.
2. Includes formation departure and recovery events. Does not include airdrop.
3. Unaided night VLL and night airdrop events are no longer required or practiced. See AFTTP
3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3.
4. Airdrop events for navigators and loadmasters may be divided into equipment, personnel,
CDS or JPADS/I-CDS airdrop events. For example, a navigator or loadmaster may be NMR due
to a personnel drop, but that does not affect equipment or CDS if not delinquent in those events.
For pilots and navigators, PADS Operator NMR status does not affect other airdrop events.
4.9.4. Crewmembers NMR for Flying Training Events.
4.9.4.1. NMR crewmembers may fly unsupervised on CONUS and OCONUS missions
if events in the delinquent category are not accomplished (OG/CC approval not required
for local, routine, and non-contingency missions). Use Table 4.7 as a guide. Note: An
individual placed in NMR status for loss of currency in takeoffs (P020), landings (P190),
or approaches (P070), will not fly unsupervised on any sortie.
4.9.4.2. Regaining Currency or Mission-Ready Status.
4.9.4.2.1. Non-current or NMR for up to 6 months. The crewmember will
demonstrate proficiency in the aircraft or simulator (as appropriate) with an instructor
in all delinquent items. Crewmembers non-current or NMR for less than 6 months
will maintain their current training level (no training folder required).
4.9.4.2.2. Non-current or NMR exceeding 6-months. For Proficiency/Basic events
identified in Tables 4.4 and 4.5, the crewmember is unqualified in the aircraft and
will complete Sq/CC-directed requalification training and an aircrew evaluation
according to AFI 11-2C-130v2 (see Table 4.7, Note 1 for clarification and
exceptions). If NMR due to Assault, Visual Low-Level, SKE, or Airdrop events
exceeding six months, the aircrew member is unqualified or uncertified in the
appropriate mission event and will complete requalification or recertification as
directed in paragraph 2.9 (Exception: Flight evaluation not required if event only
requires certification). Use Table 4.7 as a guide for grouping events. NMR due to
NVG events does not affect the unaided event (e.g., NMR due to NVG airdrop does
not affect airdrop). Crewmembers will regain NVG certification by flying with an
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 43
instructor for the particular NVG event. NMR due to Miscellaneous Flying Training
Events exceeding six months requires proficiency to be demonstrated in the aircraft,
simulator or verbally debriefed (except for P280, Aircrew Chemical Defense Task
Qualification Training (ACDTQT)) to the satisfaction of a like-position qualified
instructor in all delinquent items.
4.10. Requirements Before PCS or TDY by Rated Members on Active Flying Status. AFI
11-202v1 specifies requirements before PCS or TDY.
4.11. Requirements Before Removal From Active Flying Status. AFI 11-202v1 specifies
requirements before removal from active flying.
4.12. Requirements While in Inactive Flying Status. AFI 11-202v1 specifies requirements
while in inactive flying status.
4.13. Retraining. AFI 11-202v1 specifies retraining restriction before separation, retirement, or
mandatory inactive flying status.
4.14. Aircrew Flying in Non-US Air Force Aircraft and with Non-US Air Force Units. AFI
11-202v1 addresses individuals flying in this status.
4.15. Training Period. Continuation training program is based on static 6-month periods (1
January – 30 June and 1 July – 31 December). MAJCOMs may adjust training periods based on
unique mission requirements (e.g. Antarctic ski mission).
44 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Chapter 5
UPGRADE TRAINING
5.1. Description. This chapter identifies general prerequisites and training requirements for
upgrade.
5.1.1. General. The flying time prerequisites for upgrade are based on the crewmember
having gained the knowledge and judgment required to effectively accomplish the unit’s
missions. Sq/CCs will ensure their continuation training programs emphasize these areas.
Table 5.1. Aircrew Qualification / Upgrade Prerequisites.
From To Prerequisites (see Note 8) Tasks and Events Required To
Complete Upgrade Notes
UNQ FP UPT Graduate PIQ course 2
UNQ MP 1000 total flying hours (800
FAIP/OSA)
PXA, PXB, or PXC course
Operational Mission Certification
Unit commander certification
1, 2, 6, 7
MC MP
Total flying hours – C-130 PAA
1300 – 300 or
900 – 700
PRA course
Operational Mission Certification
Unit commander certification
6
FP MP
Total flying hours – C-130 PAA
1300 – 300 or
900 – 700
MPD Pilot Check Out course
Operational Mission Certification
Unit commander certification
6
FP/MP IP 200 hours since AC Certification PIN course
Unit commander certification 6
UNQ MN CSO Graduate NIQ course
FN/MN IN Total flying hours – C-130 PAA
1000 – 200
NIN course
Unit commander certification 6
UNQ FF Basic FE Course FEQ1LP course
FF MF FEQ1LP course FEQ3LP course
FF/MF IF
Total flying hours – C-130 PAA
2000 – 200 or
400 PAA
FIN course
Unit commander certification 3, 6
UNQ FL Basic LM Course LMQ1LP course|
FL ML LMQ1LP course LMQ3LP course
FL/ML IL 200 PAA LIN course
Unit commander certification 4, 5
Instructor Evaluator Sq/CC Recommendation Flight Examiner course
Unit commander certification
NOTES:
1. Cross-flow pilots will have 100 total C-130 hours prior to certification to aircraft commander
(includes time at the formal school but does not include ―other‖ time).
2. Refer all Rotary Wing pilots to MAJCOM/A3T for a training recommendation
3. MF will have a X1A151 primary AFSC (or higher); X1A171 is desired.
4. ML will have a X1A251 primary AFSC (or higher); X1A271 is desired.
5. Airdrop qualified ML will have a minimum of 15 actual aerial delivery sorties of which a
minimum of 10 will be some combination of actual equipment or CDS events.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 45
6. Level C or better WST time is creditable towards PAA Time.
7. Any qualified candidate may be trained using a cross-flow course for IQT/MQT at the
gaining unit commander’s or appropriate AFRC/ANG supervisor’s discretion. Comply with
course syllabus prerequisites.
8. The prerequisites are defined by total flying time and C-130 time. For example, a C-130
flight engineer upgrading to instructor would need 2000 total hours and 200 C-130 PAA hours or
400 PAA hours with any amount of total hours.
5.2. C-130 Mobility Pilot Development (MPD).
5.2.1. General. The MPD program includes the Pilot Initial Qualification (PIQ) formal
training course, continuation training and the Pilot Check-out (PCO) course. All MPD pilots
are dual-seat qualified for basic qualification events. Graduation from the FTU until AC
certification takes approximately two years. Training timelines are based on individual
performance. Unit commanders will tailor training to match each individual’s capabilities
and experience level.
5.2.2. MPD Pilot (FPH). During initial training, MPD pilots receive left-seat qualification
and right-seat mission training. After unit indoctrination, they are qualified to accomplish
proficiency/basic events and mission events per paragraph 4.5.3.1. MPD course graduates
may perform pilot-flying NVG takeoffs and landings from either seat.
5.2.2.1. MPD Assault Operations. Upon completion of initial formal training, MPD
pilots are only qualified for pilot-monitoring duties during assault operations. Formal
assault training will be part of the Pilot Checkout (PCO) Course. There are no
continuation training requirements for MPD pilots to accomplish pilot flying assault
takeoffs or landings.
5.2.2.2. MPD Development. The MPD pilot concentrates on left- and right-seat flying
and monitoring duties and observation of aircraft commander duties and responsibilities.
They are assigned MPD code FPH per paragraph 5.2.3. The MPD pilot has a left- and
right-seat flying requirement as listed in Table 4.4. The MPD pilot gradually acquires
and refines skills leading toward Aircraft Commander Qualification and Certification.
5.2.2.3. MPD Development – Formal Aircraft Commander Certification Phase. During
this phase, the MPD begins the formal upgrade for aircraft commander.
5.2.3. Pilot Designation Codes. AFI 11-401 defines pilot aviation codes. Use the codes from
Table 5.2 (3rd letter designator distinguishes the status for a MPD pilot who completed
formal training). Navigators, flight engineers, and loadmasters will refer to paragraph 3.2.3
for designation codes. This ARMS code does not affect the qualification status listed on the
AF Form 8. See AFI11-401, AMCSUP 1 for additional guidance.
Table 5.2. Pilot Designation Codes.
If first two
characters are:
Then the crewmember is a:
"FP" Qualified Pilot. Then if 3rd character is: ―N‖ Qualified Non-Mission Ready (NMR). This is used for the
following:
46 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
1. Pilot currently in the PCO course and has not completed
qualification checkride
2. Pilot Initial Qualification (PIQ) course graduate currently in local
mission ready training
3. If the PIQ/Legacy Copilot will be NMR for an EXTENDED
period of time (greater than a month).
4. Not used for short duration NMR status due to DNIF or short
term currency deficiencies
5. Senior Officer Course (SOC) graduate ―L‖ Qualified Non-Mission Ready (NMR). This is used for the
following:
1. Graduate of aircraft commander course in local mission ready
training.
2. Pilots designated ―E‖ level for continuation training. ―C‖ Qualified Mission Ready (MR) Traditional Co-Pilot (Non-MPD);
replaces MC designation. ―H‖ Qualified Mission Ready (MR) MPD Pilot
"MP" Fully Certified/Qualified Aircraft Commander. If 3rd character is:
―N‖ Non-Mission Ready (NMR) Aircraft Commander. This code is used:
1. If the MP will be NMR for an EXTENDED period of time
(greater than a month)
2. Not used for short duration NMR status due to DNIF or short
term currency deficiencies
"IP" Fully Certified/Qualified Instructor Pilot who is performing instruction on the
mission.
"EP" Fully Certified Flight Examiner performing evaluator duties.
5.3. Aircraft Commander (AC). See minimum flying-hour requirements in Table 5.1.
5.3.1. General. The flying time prerequisites for upgrade are based on the pilot having
gained the knowledge and judgment required to effectively accomplish the unit’s missions.
Sq/CCs will ensure continuation training programs emphasize these areas. Pilots will have an
adequate knowledge of systems, procedures, and instructions before entering the formal
upgrade program. The following guidance applies:
5.3.1.1. Aircraft Commander Candidate. An individual designated by the Sq/CC or
appropriate ARC Air Operations Officer for entry into training for aircraft commander
upgrade. Once designated, traditional copilots may fly from the left seat and perform
flight maneuvers authorized for an aircraft commander when under the direct supervision
of an IP. MPD pilots are considered to be Aircraft Commander Candidates when starting
the PCO Course.
5.3.1.2. Aircraft Commander Upgrade. An individual currently enrolled in a formal
aircraft commander upgrade course. All traditional copilots upgrading to aircraft
commander who attend the FTU for academics and flying will complete the AC
Preparatory Course (ACP) before formal aircraft commander upgrade training. MPD
pilots do not require ACP.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 47
5.3.1.3. MPD Pilot Checkout. The process for aircraft commander certification will
include the PCO Course and an Operational Mission Certification. For MPD pilots, in-
unit upgrade will be the primary upgrade process. No waivers are required for in-unit
MPD to aircraft commander upgrade. The FTUs will have some capability to provide
PCO flying training through the PFT process. All simulator training sites will provide
PCO academic and simulator training. Units may schedule the PCO academic and
simulator training through their MAJCOM quota manager.
5.3.2. AC Certification. Pilots will not be designated pilot in command until certified as an
aircraft commander by the Sq/CC. Pilots will complete all ―tasks and events required‖ in
Table 5.1.
5.3.3. Global Ready Aircraft Commander Course (GRACC). GRACC is a three-phase
process designed to familiarize pilots with all aspects of operating in the en route system. The
three phases are divided as follows: Pilot to Aircraft Commander Phase I (V280), Pilot to
Aircraft Commander Phase II (V281), and HQ AMC Orientation Tour (V282). See Chapter
7 for course description.
5.3.3.1. Applicability. GRACC training is mandatory for AMC pilots and highly
encouraged for other commands. Since slots are limited, OG/CCs will determine
attendance requirements for their pilots. A one-time course, completion is transferable
between all mobility weapon systems. Waiver authority is OG/CC.
5.3.3.2. Documentation. Completion of each phase of GRACC is documented in ARMS
(V280, V281, and V282). Document the completion of the entire course via the AF Form
4324 as ―GRACC‖ using ARMS event identifier Q280.
5.3.3.3. Training Guides. GRACC workbooks are available for download on the
AMC/A3T CoP at https://afkm.wpafb.af.mil/AMC_A3T. Workbooks should be
carried on all sorties to maximize training opportunities. Additional information on
GRACC can be located on the ETCA website,
https://etca.randolph.af.mil/showcourse.asp?as_course_id=GRACC. MAJCOMs
may substitute an alternate aircraft-specific Training Guide for the Phase II Training
Guide. The alternate Training Guide should emphasize aircraft systems.
5.3.3.4. Phase I. Pilot To Aircraft Commander Phase I (V280). This phase consists of
completing the V280 generic MAF workbook. MPD Pilots/copilots will complete this
V280 workbook NLT 180 days after becoming mission ready. The workbook will help
new pilots become familiar with moving a mission within the Mobility Enroute System
and other associated requirements. For non-AMC unit or first assignment instructor pilot
(FAIP)/operational support airlift (OSA) pilots transitioning to MAF aircraft, V280 will
not be accomplished; however V281 and V282 are still required.
5.3.3.5. Phase II. Pilot To Aircraft Commander Phase II (V281). The second phase
consists of completing a second workbook. V281 will serve to review all the objectives in
Phase I (V280) with more MDS specific topics. Pilots will complete V281 before Phase
III (V282) and starting their formal aircraft commander upgrade. Aircraft Commander
candidates who have transferred from non-AMC units or FAIP/OSA assignments will
complete V281 and V282 before AC certification. MAJCOMs may substitute the
GRACC workbook with the C-130-specific Aircraft Commander Upgrade Workbook
48 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
located on the AMC/A3TA CoP under C-130 Courseware. The CoP is located at
https://afkm.wpafb.af.mil/AMC_A3TA. MAJCOMS may approve alternate Phase II
workbooks for their units.
5.3.3.6. Phase III HQ AMC Orientation Tour Phase III (V282). The third phase visits
HQ AMC and the 618 TACC. This event provides an in-depth look at selected 618
TACC and AMC operations as well as an opportunity to interact with command senior
staff. Ideally, this course should be completed by aircraft commander candidates after
completing Phase II and before formal aircraft commander upgrade. If unable to
complete V282 prior to aircraft commander certification, units may schedule training up
to 90 days after certification. Beyond 90 days requires OG/CC approval.
5.3.3.7. POC is HQ AMC/A3TF, DSN 779-3576,
[email protected]. Provide the date of requested tour, name, rank,
SSN, phone number, e-mail, base and operations group assigned. Tour coordination
should be through OG or OSS level training office. ANG units will request HQ AMC
Orientation Tour dates with NGB/A3OM.
5.3.4. In-Unit Upgrade. For traditional copilots, formal school attendance is the primary
method for aircraft commander qualification training. In-unit upgrade requires a waiver
request according to Chapter 1. For MPD pilots, in-unit upgrade is the normal upgrade
method. No waivers are required for MPD pilots.
5.3.4.1. Use the approved ATS courseware (or command-approved courseware for non-
ATS).
5.3.4.2. Complete applicable ground and flying requirements of this volume.
5.3.5. Operational Mission Certification (OMC). The Operational Mission Certification
flight is intended to verify that Aircraft Commander Candidates possess the appropriate
knowledge, decision making and flying skills (i.e. assault landings) required to operate
within the worldwide mobility system. OMC profiles will be accomplished off-station and
remain over night in conjunction with a JA/ATT, SAAM or locally generated off-station
trainer. Additional requirements may be accomplished at the discretion of the OG/CC;
however, they should reflect the unit’s mission.
5.3.5.1. All MPD pilots and first-time C-130 Aircraft Commanders will accomplish an
OMC to the satisfaction of an instructor prior to Aircraft Commander certification within
the unit.
5.3.5.2. If units can not comply with the off-station and over-night requirements, the
OG/CC may approve an alternate scenario that meets the intent of the OMC.
5.4. Aircrew Instructor Program. This course is designed to teach selected crewmembers
fundamentals and concepts of instructing. Instructor candidates will be selected based on
experience, judgment, ability to instruct, flying skill, and technical knowledge.
5.4.1. For instructor upgrade prerequisites, see Table 5.1.
5.4.2. All instructor candidates will demonstrate to a flight examiner their ability to instruct
and perform selected maneuvers and items according to applicable directives.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 49
5.4.3. Instructor candidates will be mission-ready in their unit’s mission. Formation airdrop
pilots and navigators will be flight-lead certified. With OG/CC approval, a former C-130E/H
instructor going through in-unit requalification may accomplish lead certification in
conjunction with instructor requalification.
5.4.4. For ground and flight training requirements, all initial aircrew instructor candidates
will complete training on the principles of instruction at the appropriate formal school.
5.4.4.1. Initial instructor candidates will attend the formal C-130 ATS instructor course.
Waivers will be reviewed on a case-by-case basis by MAJCOM/A3T if formal school
course slots are not available.
5.4.4.2. All initial instructor candidates who attend the FTU will complete the
Preparatory Course before formal instructor upgrade training. Aircraft commanders
should demonstrate aptitude in all IP maneuvers. Initial instructor candidates who have a
waiver to upgrade in-unit will complete the associated Preparatory Course academic
courseware, but do not need to complete any Preparatory Course flying requirements.
5.4.5. Instructor candidates who previously attended a formal instructor course for instructor
qualification and were qualified in any US Air Force aircraft as an instructor (or were
instructors in other DoD fixed-wing aircraft) may upgrade in-unit without completing the
ATS course. In-unit instructor upgrades require OG/CC approval. MAJCOM waivers are not
required. Unit commanders determine training required to complete upgrade. Unit
commanders may require prior instructors to attend the ATS formal course. Refer to Table
1.2 for in-unit training time limits.
5.4.6. Instructor Responsibilities:
5.4.6.1. Instructors are responsible to provide thorough preflight briefings and critiques.
Instructors will comply with requirements of mission outlines, as appropriate, for the type
mission being flown.
5.4.6.2. Instructors will review each trainee’s training record prior to performing each
training flight or session.
5.4.6.3. Instructors will ensure all required upgrade training items are completed, signed
off, and proficiency demonstrated IAW AFI 11-2C-130v2 grading requirements before
recommending trainee for evaluation or certifying the student as qualified in a tactic or
mission.
5.4.6.4. Instructor Pilots. Instructor pilots shall be fully aware they are in command of
the aircraft on training flights and are responsible at all times for flight conduct and
aircraft safety. Should the trainee’s judgment or proficiency at the controls raise a
question in the instructor’s mind as to the trainee’s ability to safely complete a prescribed
maneuver at any time during the flight, the instructor will immediately assume aircraft
control. The instructor should then explain and demonstrate proper tactics, techniques,
and procedures for the maneuver prior to the trainee resuming control of the aircraft. All
instructors will place special emphasis on procedures for positively identifying
emergency conditions before initiating corrective action.
5.4.6.5. Instructor Navigators, Flight Engineers, and Loadmasters. Responsibility for
safely executing duties of their position will be emphasized to each aircrew member.
50 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Should the judgment or proficiency of the trainee raise a question in the instructor’s mind
as to the trainee’s ability to safely execute the duties of the aircrew position at any time
during the flight, the instructor will immediately takeover those duties. The instructor
should then explain and demonstrate the proper method of executing those duties prior to
the trainee resuming duties.
5.5. Flight Examiner Certification.
5.5.1. Flight Examiners. Sq/CC will recommend instructors for flight examiner certification.
Instructors identified for certification as flight examiner will possess satisfactory knowledge
of training and evaluation policies and procedures and the ability to administer evaluations
according to applicable publications.
5.5.2. Flight examiner candidates will complete the ATS flight examiner course for their
crew position. Squadron commanders may waive this requirement if the candidate is a
previously qualified flight examiner in any USAF aircraft. Flight examiner candidates
should:
5.5.2.1. Observe qualified evaluators conducting a cross-section of evaluations, to
include techniques used to evaluate aircraft systems and flight directive knowledge.
5.5.2.2. Receive a briefing on command policies and interpretations of AFI 11-202v1,
AFI 11-202v2, AFI 11-2C-130v1 and 2, and MAJCOM supplements.
5.6. Lead Certification. This section prescribes the prerequisites, qualifications, and training
requirements necessary for upgrade to element leader and formation leader for aircraft
commanders and navigators. Accomplish the upgrade training using the appropriate ATS
courseware and locally developed training guide.
5.6.1. Two-Ship Element Lead. This section prescribes the prerequisites, qualifications, and
training requirements necessary for upgrade to two-ship element leader for aircraft
commanders and navigators. This training program will provide aircrew members situational
awareness and experience in preparation for formation lead upgrade. AWADS-capable units
will normally accomplish two-ship element lead upgrade in conjunction with AWADS
upgrade. Accomplish the upgrade training using the appropriate ATS courseware or locally
produced training guide.
5.6.1.1. Prerequisites. Commanders should select highly qualified mission ready aircraft
commanders and navigators for two-ship element lead upgrade. Do not use flying hour
totals alone as a measure of experience. Put significant weight on leadership abilities,
knowledge of tactics, techniques, and procedures, ability to adapt to rapidly changing
situations, and skill at operating in day visual, SKE, and NVG formations in the low-
level, aerial delivery environment.
5.6.1.2. Ground Training Requirements. Design two-ship element lead training to
prepare an aircraft commander or navigator for the following responsibilities: two-ship
formation and element lead, two-ship mission commander, application of C-130 tactics,
techniques, and procedures, and combat mission planning and execution. See AFTTP 3-
3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3
5.6.1.3. Flying Training. The primary responsibility of a two-ship element leader is to
lead two-ship formations and two-ship elements within a larger formation through a
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 51
variety of situations to an objective. Place emphasis for in-flight training on wingman
consideration, two-ship visual formation and element lead duties, SKE element lead
duties, course and time control, communications, tactical formation maneuvering,
formation departures and arrivals, and reaction to threats. As a minimum:
5.6.1.3.1. Fly in the two-ship formation lead and element lead position for visual
operations and fly in the element lead position for instrument (SKE) operations
during airdrop missions. The instructor will ensure that the candidate has the
opportunity to respond to a variety of in-flight changes such as threat avoidance,
weather avoidance, and changing user requirements.
5.6.2. Formation/Flight Lead.
5.6.2.1. Prerequisites. Commanders should select highly qualified mission ready aircraft
commanders and navigators for lead upgrade. Do not use flying hour totals alone as a
measure of experience. Put more weight on leadership abilities, knowledge of tactics,
techniques, and procedures, systems and procedural knowledge, ability to adapt to rapidly
changing situations, and skill at operating in day visual, SKE, and NVG formations in the
low-level, aerial delivery environment.
5.6.2.2. Ground Training Requirements. Design lead training to prepare an aircraft
commander or navigator for the following responsibilities: formation or flight lead,
deputy flight lead, mission commander, and combat mission planning and execution.
5.6.2.3. Flying Training. The primary responsibility of a formation lead is to lead the
formation through a variety of situations to an objective. Place emphasis for in-flight
training on course and time control, communications, formation requirements, wingman
consideration, tactical formation maneuvering, formation departures and arrivals,
adaptability to changing scenario, and reaction to threats. As a minimum:
5.6.2.3.1. Fly in the formation lead position for both visual and instrument (SKE)
operations during both airdrop and airland missions. The instructor will ensure that
the candidate has the opportunity to respond to a variety of in-flight changes such as
threat avoidance, weather avoidance, command-and-control directed-diverts,
changing user requirements, loss of escort or drop zone support, and time slips. Use
of all secure communications and electronic combat systems is essential in lead
upgrade flying training. Emphasis should be on nuances of how to be a flight lead or
element lead versus the number of run-ins.
5.7. Night Vision Goggle (NVG) Training. NVGs are standard for night operations in the C-
130. Primary method for NVG training is during initial FTU qualification. This section outlines
the MAF NVG training programs for those crewmembers who did not receive NVG training at
the FTU during initial or requalification training. Units may complete NVG training in unit
without waivers using the MAF-approved syllabus located on the AMC/A3TA CoP.
5.7.1. NVG Airdrop Certification. This training is designed for all crew positions to certify
the crew to perform airdrop to overt and covert DZ's using NVGs. Units will conduct C-130
NVG airdrop training based on MAJCOM/A3 approval. If accomplished in-unit, NVG
airdrop training program may run concurrent with the MAF C-130 NVG airland, and unit
indoctrination and vice-versa. See appropriate syllabus and AFTTP 3-3.C-130.
52 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
5.7.2. NVG Airland Certification. This training is designed for all crew positions to certify
the crew to land on overt or covert runways and conduct ground operations on blacked-out
taxiways and ramps. Minimum required runway lighting is overt or covert, IAW AFI 13-217,
Drop Zone and Landing Zone Operations, or standard airfield lighting, to include
expeditionary airfield lighting systems (EALS). Units will conduct C-130 NVG airland
training based on MAJCOM/A3 approval. If accomplished in-unit, NVG airland training
program may run concurrent with the MAF C-130 NVG airdrop and unit indoctrination and
vice-versa. See appropriate syllabus and AFTTP 3-3.C-130.
5.7.3. NVG Assault Certification. This program is designed to certify the pilot, copilot,
navigator, and engineer crew positions in C-130 NVG assault operations. NVG airland-
certified loadmasters are considered NVG assault certified and do not require this training.
Minimum required LZ lighting is overt or covert, IAW AFI 13-217 or standard airfield
lighting, to include EALS. Units will conduct C-130 NVG Assault Training based on
MAJCOM/A3 approval using MAF-approved courseware. C-130 NVG Airland certification
is a prerequisite to C-130 NVG Assault training. The MAF NVG Airdrop Training program
may run concurrently with this training program and unit indoctrination. See appropriate
syllabus and AFTTP 3-3.C-130.
5.7.4. NVG Formation Takeoff and Landing. Formation qualified crewmembers who are
certified in NVG Airland are certified for NVG formation takeoffs and landings.
5.8. Phoenix Banner Certification. Squadron commanders and operations officers will ensure
that crew members chosen for these missions are highly capable. Selection should be based on
qualification, proficiency, experience, maturity, and mission complexity.
5.8.1. Units will establish and maintain Phoenix Banner training programs. As a minimum,
training will consist of an instructor-led in-depth review of AFI 11-289, Phoenix Banner,
Silver, and Copper Operations, discussion of tasking and execution agencies for Phoenix
Banner missions, and how the aircrew will interface with these agencies. Furthermore, the
program will address the personnel to coordinate with, in case of diversion or delay,
including the presidential Advance Agent, US Secret Service, HMX-1 representative. The
goal of training is to educate crewmembers on the requirements for these
individuals/agencies and illustrate their ability to help accomplish the mission. Following the
review, an open book examination of AFI 11-289, minimum 80 percent, corrected to 100
percent will be accomplished. Before commanding a Phoenix Banner, Silver, or Copper
mission, aircraft commanders require squadron commander certification IAW AFI 11-289.
5.9. Joint Precision Airdrop System (JPADS) Certification.
5.9.1. The JPADS training program is designed for all crew positions. This program allows
MAF combat delivery aircrews to improve airdrop accuracy during high altitude airdrop
employment utilizing the PADS mission planner and JPADS. Improved CDS (I-CDS) and
JPADS operations are conducted using the UHF Dropsonde Receiver, GPS-retransmission
link equipment and PADS Mission Planner (PADS-MP) laptop and software. I-CDS
operations use standard-rigged CDS loads with non-steerable chutes; JPADS operations are
conducted using steerable chutes with Airborne Guidance Units (AGU). For both types of
airdrop, the PADS MP laptop will be used to determine a more precise airdrop release point
or launch acceptability region (LAR). Crews will comply with all requirements of AFI 13-
217.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 53
5.9.2. JPADS Airdrop: This training is designed to allow single/multiple ship I-CDS or
JPADS operations using low, medium, or high altitude procedures. JPADS airdrop training
is accomplished with the PADS mission planner and either normal ballistic loads or JPADS-
guided loads depending on availability. When ballistic loads (i.e., I-CDS) are used in lieu of
JPADS guided loads, an in-flight wireless update will be completed to a static AGU for
training prior to the drop.
5.9.3. I-CDS and JPADS certification and currency. I-CDS and JPADS certification will be
completed in accordance with the JPADS training syllabus and guide. For JPADS
operations, C-130E/H are considered the same MDS. JPADS PADS operator (PO) mobile
training team (MTT) instructors must be an IP or IN but are not required to be qualified in
the MDS (e.g., a certified C-130J IP may perform PADS operator primary or instructional
duties on a C-130E/H). For non-MDS qualified crew members, log other time with crew
duty position as XN/XP. Crewmembers who previously completed the interim JPADS
training syllabus are considered JPADS certified. All crewmembers will complete Phase I
training. Phase I Pilots and Flight Engineers will receive a JPADS certification, but will not
require any continuation training. In addition, crewmembers performing PADS Operator
(PO) or loadmaster (LM) duties will complete Phase II qualification training, and require
continuation training. All navigators entered into JPADS training will complete Phase II
training and be PO certified. Pilots may also complete Phase II training and be certified as
PADS operators. PO certification includes I-CDS and JPADS drop operations. If a
unit/Mobile Training Team does not have access to syllabus-required training equipment,
instructors will, with unit CC/DO concurrence, determine if a PO student has received
sufficient instruction for certification. All simulated events must be verbally debriefed. For
example, if a unit has Dropsondes but no AGU, consider the PO syllabus Wireless Transfer
Event complete if the student imports Dropsonde data and simulates Wireless AGU Data
Transfer. LM certification is split into I-CDS (Phase I) and JPADS operations (Phase II).
LM’s that do not complete hands-on AGU training will be certified as Phase I only until
JPADS Phase II training is complete.
5.9.4. Upon completion of applicable training, crewmembers are considered JPADS/I-CDS
certified or I-CDS-only certified as described in paragraph 5.9.3. Units may document Phase
I training on AF Form 1522, ARMS Additional Training Accomplishment Report, for non-PO
pilots and flight engineers. Use ARMS event identifiers Q502 ―JPADS/I-CDS certification‖
for non-PO certified pilots and flight engineers, Q521 ―JPADS Phase I‖ for I-CDS/non-
guided certified loadmasters, and Q522 ―JPADS Phase II‖ for PADS Operator certified
crewmembers and JPADS certified loadmasters.
5.9.5. The PADS Operator (PO) is defined as any JPADS Phase II certified rated officer.
Normally this consists of the navigator or an additional pilot, but may also be a PADS
Operator from another airframe (e.g., C-130J, C-17). For the purposes of non-current PADS
Operators who need an instructor, like specialty is not required (e.g., a pilot PADS Operator
may instruct a navigator PADS Operator on events AD11 or AD12).
5.10. Unimproved Landing Certification. Conduct this one-time training for aircraft
commanders under the direct supervision of an instructor on dirt or unimproved airfields using
assault procedures. Unimproved airfields are airfields where runway acquisition and ground
operations are complicated by blowing snow, sand, or dirt; undulating terrain, or minimum
54 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
runway lighting or markings. Only affects MR status for missions requiring unimproved field
landings. Units will record and track this training.
5.11. Functional Check Flight (FCF) Certification. AFI 11-2C-130v3, outlines FCF
requirements. FCF pilots and flight engineers will be selected from highly qualified instructors.
The candidate will complete a review of applicable technical orders. The pilot candidate will fly
in the copilot position on a minimum of one FCF prior to unit commander certification.
5.12. Touch and Go Landing Certification. MPD pilots receive touch and go training and
certification as part of initial qualification at the FTU. See AFI11-2C-130v3 for touch-and-go
landing limitations.
5.12.1. Pilots may be touch-and-go certified after completion of the aircraft commander
initial qualification evaluation, having successfully demonstrated a touch-and-go as part of
the landing criteria described in AFI 11-2C-130v2. Aircraft commanders will not fly touch-
and-go landings until certified for the event by the Sq/CC.
5.12.1.1. Training includes accomplishment of their own flight idle touch-and-go
landings and supervising the other pilot’s flight idle touch-and-go landings.
5.12.2. NVG Touch and Go Landing Certification.
5.12.2.1. Sq/CC may certify a touch-and-go certified aircraft commander for NVG
touch-and-go landings after completion of NVG Airland training.
5.13. Medium and High Altitude Aerial Delivery Certification. See paragraph 7.4.1 and
Attachment 1 for altitude definitions. Navigators will accomplish high-altitude airdrop using a
high-altitude release point (HARP) or computed air release point (CARP) depending on the type
airdrop accomplished. HARP airdrops require special certification. Navigators will accomplish
the first HARP airdrop under the direct supervision of a high-altitude certified instructor. Use the
ATS courseware for this training. CARP airdrops at high altitude do not require special
certification. High altitude airdrops may be credited as the appropriate type of airdrop (i.e.,
HALO or HAHO personnel count as a personnel airdrop). During continuation training,
crewmembers may simulate the actual airdrop but will comply with all considerations and
procedures in AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3. There is no certification required for
other crewmembers.
5.14. Grid Navigation Certification. If required due to aircraft equipment or unit mission, this
section outlines the certification and continuation training requirements for a navigator to be
qualified to fly above 65 degrees north or below 70 degrees south.
5.14.1. Prerequisites. Navigators will be basic aircraft qualified to begin grid training.
5.14.2. Certification Training. Accomplish ground and flying training according to ATS
courseware. A minimum of one flight will be accomplished in the aircraft. Certification is
IAW AFI 11-2C-130v2.
5.14.3. Flying Continuation Training. Accomplish according to Table 4.4.
5.14.4. Grid profile (day or night). This event uses a grid reference system for aircraft
steering and should continue for at least a 2-hour period. Instructor navigators may credit a
grid event on a category I or II route. Grid profiles may also be logged as a navigational
profile if requirements are met.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 55
5.15. Modular Airborne Fire Fighting System (MAFFS). The MAFFS mission is a joint
mission performed by ANG, AFRC, and US Forest Service (USFS) personnel as a partnership
with USFS as the lead federal agency. The term MAFFS is used as a generic term which
includes both MAFFS (legacy) and MAFFS II. This section establishes the continuation training
requirements for a MAFFS-certified C-130 crewmember. In addition, MAFFS Instructor
certification guidance is included. OG/CCs of MAFFS units may provide additional guidance or
clarification in local training procedures. MAJCOM/A3T approval is required if changing policy
or guidance in paragraph 5.15 or its subparagraphs.
5.15.1. Requirements.
5.15.1.1. MAFFS syllabus changes and updates will be prepared by the lead-designated
MAFFS unit and forwarded to NGB/A3O and AFRC/A3T for coordination. NGB/A3O,
AFRC/A3T and AMC/A3T will coordinate on the MAFFS syllabus. NGB/A3O will
maintain the master files and approve syllabus changes and updates upon receipt of
coordination from AFRC/A3T. Final syllabus approval is NGB/A3 and AFRC/A3.
5.15.1.2. Conduct MAFFS Certification for pilots, navigators, flight engineers, and
loadmasters IAW the approved training syllabus. Upon completion of training, as
detailed in this instruction and the syllabus, crewmembers will be certified for MAFFS
missions. Flight evaluations are not required to certify MAFFS aircrew.
5.15.2. Approval/Waiver for MAFFS Certification. The MAFFS unit’s Sq/CC, through the
squadron TRP is the approval authority for MAFFS Certification. The MAFFS unit’s OG/CC
is the waiver authority for MAFFS aircrew continuation training requirements.
5.15.3. Time Period for Mission Certification Training. There is no specified training time
limit due to the availability of the annual MAFFS training program conducted by the US
Forest Service (USFS).
5.15.4. MAFFS Training Prerequisites. For all crew positions, the crewmembers will be
highly qualified C-130 Mission Ready crewmembers who are airdrop qualified. Pilots will
be formation and visual low level qualified. Crewmembers must have the availability to
complete the required training and respond to mission tasking during the wildfire season.
Aircrew will be designated by the OG/CC for course entry.
5.15.5. MAFFS Initial Training. Accomplish ground and flight training under the
supervision of a MAFFS instructor. All training will be conducted IAW the approved
MAFFS Syllabus and training guides during the annual training session conducted by USFS,
at a location determined by the USFS. A flight evaluation is not required. Upon successful
completion of all required training items, instructors will nominate the crewmember for
certification. Once certified, crewmembers will be allowed to perform MAFFS mission
duties in their crew position.
5.15.5.1. Instructors. MAFFS instructor candidates will be selected from among the most
qualified instructors and will be experienced in all phases of MAFFS flying operations,
including actual wild fire airdrops. Prior to certifying instructors to teach MAFFS, they
will receive training that will include ground and flight certification requirements under
the supervision of a MAFFS instructor.
56 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
5.15.5.2. MAFFS II Certification. As outlined in the MAFFS Syllabus, current MAFFS
(legacy) crewmembers only require differences training to become MAFFS II certified.
MAFFS (legacy) and MAFFS II are two separate certifications. The OG/CC may
authorize multiple certifications for crewmembers to remain current on both MAFFS
(legacy) and MAFFS II.
5.15.6. Continuation Training. This section outlines ground and flying continuation training
requirements for MAFFS-certified pilots and loadmasters. MAFFS continuation training will
be accomplished during the annual training session conducted by USFS, at a location
determined by USFS. The USFS normally schedules the annually training program during
the month of May to be compatible with the majority of the fire season demand on MAFFS.
If a crewmember does not attend the annual training session, they are considered non-current
and may regain currency on an actual fire under the direct supervision of a MAFFS
instructor. If a crewmember loses airdrop qualification, they will also lose MAFFS
certification until qualification is regained. In addition, if pilots lose formation or visual low
level qualification, they will also lose MAFFS certification until qualification is regained.
Navigators and flight engineers have no MAFFS continuation training requirement.
5.15.6.1. USFS Certification. A MAFFS Instructor will supervise all MAFFS ground and
flying continuation training. MAFFS Sq/CCs or OG/CCs will certify individual
crewmember qualifications to the USFS upon successful completion of all required
training items.
5.15.6.2. Continuation Training Requirements. MAFFS currency duration shall be based
on the annual MAFFS training program.
5.15.6.3. Ground Training. Accomplish annual ground training IAW Table 5.3.
5.15.6.4. Flight Training. Accomplish annual flying training IAW Table 5.4.
5.15.6.5. MAFFS Training is a one-time event for navigators and flight engineers. These
crew positions have no MAFFS continuation training or currency requirements.
Table 5.3. MAFFS Ground Continuation Training Events (Pilots and Loadmasters).
Event Frequency Position
Review MAFFS System Components & Functions A L
Retardant & Air Servicing Procedures A L
Ground and Pit Operations. A P, L
Checklist Procedures A P, L
In-flight Procedures A P, L
Emergency Procedures A P, L
Principles of CRM/ORM/aircrew discipline A P, L
Crew Coordination A P, L
Hazards of Mountain Flying A P
Aircraft Performance A P
NOTE: A-Annual
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 57
Table 5.4. MAFFS Mission Continuation Flying Requirements (Pilots and Loadmasters).
Event Pilots Loadmasters
MAFFS Mission Events A/B/C CUR A/B/C CUR
Airdrop Events (Dry/Wet) 6/3 A 0/3 A
NOTE: A-Annual
5.15.7. Re-currency/Recertification Training Requirements
5.15.7.1. Pilots and loadmasters normally regain MAFFS currency by completing the
annual MAFFS training program conducted by the USFS. If a member does not
complete the annual refresher training, they may regain currency on a wild fire activation.
However, the individual will be under direct supervision of a MAFFS instructor and the
currency training will be coordinated with the Expeditionary Aerospace Squadron-
Wildland Firefighting Commander (EAS-WFF/CC). If an individual misses two
scheduled annual MAFFS training programs and remains non-current, that individual will
regain currency by completing retraining as directed by the home-station Sq/CC.
5.16. Aerial Spray Certification. Aerial spray training will certify and maintain aircrew
certification for the airborne application of pesticides, decontaminates, and oil dispersants using
the Modular Aerial Spray System (MASS). HQ AFRC/A3T is the OPR for this section. This
section establishes the minimum training requirements for a mission-qualified C-130
crewmember to complete Aerial Spray Certification training, as well as recertification and
continuation requirements. OG/CCs of MASS units may provide additional guidance or
clarification in local training procedures (MAJCOM approval is required if changing policy or
guidance in paragraph 5.16 or its subparagraphs).
5.16.1. Requirements.
5.16.1.1. Aerial Spray Certification Training (ASCT) courseware changes and updates
will be prepared by the 910AW and forwarded to HQ 22AF/A3T for coordination and
approval. HQ 22AF/A3T will coordinate on the proposed changes and forward their
recommendations to HQ AFRC/A3T. HQ AFRC/A3T will review and approve the
ASCT syllabus and maintain the master files.
5.16.1.2. Conduct C-130 ASCT for all aircrew positions IAW HQ AFRC/A3T approved
courseware. 910AW will ensure the applicability and currency of aerial spray courseware
and training guides.
5.16.2. Approval/Waiver for Local ASCT. The 910 Airlift Wing, 757 Airlift Squadron,
Youngstown ARS, Ohio has sole responsibility for the fixed-wing aerial spray operations and
training in the DOD. Units requesting waivers for secondary method training will submit
requests according to paragraph 1.5.
5.16.3. Time Period for Spray Certification Training. Crewmembers will start ASCT within
90 days after selection for aerial spray training. Pilots, navigators, flight engineers, and
loadmasters (spray operators) will complete ASCT within 240 days.
5.16.4. Aerial Spray Certification Training Prerequisites.
5.16.4.1. Pilots, navigators, flight engineers, and loadmasters will complete mission
qualification training (MQT) according to Chapter 3 and be current and qualified prior
58 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
to entering ASCT. ASCT courseware may be accomplished in conjunction with
910AW/757AS Aerial Spray Indoctrination. If a crewmember loses mission qualified
status, they will also lose aerial spray certification until MQ status is regained.
5.16.4.2. Crewmembers will establish a baseline blood cholinesterase level prior to the
first organophosphate chemical mission.
5.16.4.3. Ground training. Prior to the initial aerial spray training flight, crewmembers:
5.16.4.3.1. Will accomplish an initial (and annually thereafter) aerial spray pesticide /
chemical familiarization and safety course.
5.16.4.3.2. Will pass a written examination covering aerial spray operations specific
to their crew position.
5.16.5. Aerial Spray Certification Training
5.16.5.1. Aerial spray certification training will include a minimum of one actual
pesticide mission.
5.16.5.1.1. Crewmembers will accomplish one sortie prior to the first actual pesticide
mission.
5.16.5.2. Accomplish ground and flight certification training IAW HQ AFRC/A3T
approved ASCT courseware and training guides.
5.16.5.3. Pilots. Training will include ground training and flying requirements. The
flying requirements include Low-Volume (LV), Ultra Low-Volume (ULV), High-
Volume (HV), Ultra High-Volume (UHV) sorties and an actual pesticide sortie. Upon
completion, pilots will be aerial spray certified.
5.16.5.4. Navigators. Training will include ground training and flying requirements. The
flying requirements include Low-Volume (LV), Ultra Low-Volume (ULV), High-
Volume (HV), Ultra High-Volume (UHV) sorties, and an actual pesticide sortie. Upon
completion, navigators will be aerial spray certified.
5.16.5.5. Flight Engineers. Training will include ground training and flying
requirements. The flying requirements include observations of the ground loading of
chemical, ULV sorties, HV sorties (1 in an oil spill dispersal scenario), and actual
pesticide sorties. Upon completion, flight engineers will be aerial spray certified.
5.16.5.6. Loadmasters. Training will include ground training and flying requirements.
The flying requirements include upload of the MASS system onto the aircraft, ULV
system preflight, LV/HV system preflight, control panel/power on preflight,
LV/HV/ground loading station chemical upload, ULV chemical upload, flushing agent
upload, spill containment / clean up scenarios, internal calibration of the MASS system,
LV/HV/ULV sorties, LV/HV/ULV emergency procedures briefing, and download of
chemical for LV/HV/ULV. Upon completion, loadmasters will be aerial spray certified.
5.16.6. Continuation Training. This section outlines ground and flying training requirements
for aerial spray certified crewmembers.
5.16.6.1. Ground Training. Accomplish training according to Chapters 2, Chapter 3,
and Chapter 4 and HQ AFRC/A3T approved ASCT courseware and training guides.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 59
5.16.6.2. Flight Training. Accomplished in accordance with Table 5.5. OG/CC may
publish in local training procedures any MAJCOM-approved changes to Table 5.5.
5.16.6.3. Event Definitions. See Chapter 7 for spray continuation training event (SP)
descriptions.
5.16.7. Recurrency and Recertification. Crewmembers regain aerial spray currency by flying
with an instructor in their crew position on an aerial spray training or operational mission. If
non-current for MQ or BQ events, crewmembers will regain currency according to Chapter
4.
Table 5.5. Aerial Spray Semiannual Continuation Flying Requirements.
Code Event Pilot Navigator Flight Engineer Loadmaster Notes
Spray Events A B C Cur A B C Cur A B C Cur A B C Cur
SP30 Pesticide Sortie A A 1 1 1 A 1 1 1 A
SP40 Spray Sortie S S 1 1 1 S S
SP50 LV/HV/UHV
Sortie
1 1 2 S 1 1 1 S 1 1 1 S
SP60 ULV Sortie 1 2 3 S 1 2 3 S 1 1 2 S
NOTE: A-Annual, S-Semiannual
5.16.8. Upgrade. This section prescribes the prerequisites, qualifications, and training
requirements necessary for upgrades. Crewmembers will upgrade to instructor according to
Chapter 5 and will be considered aerial spray instructor certified without any further training
or evaluation. Aircraft Commanders who are aerial spray certified copilots and MPD pilots
will upgrade to aerial spray aircraft commander according to Chapter 5 and upon
completion of further upgrade training or evaluation.
5.16.8.1. Time Period to Certification. Maximum time period for upgrade to aerial spray
aircraft commander is 240 days after course entry.
5.16.8.2. Prerequisites.
5.16.8.2.1. Aerial spray aircraft commander candidates will be aerial spray qualified
copilots.
5.16.8.2.2. Aerial spray aircraft commander candidates will be highly experienced in
the spray mission, with at least 5 actual pesticide missions, or 10 pesticide spray
sorties, and will have a minimum of 500 PAA flying hours. NOTE: ―Highly
experienced‖ candidates would normally have an appropriate experience mix of
mission planning, installation briefings, chemical loading, chart preparation, and
UHV/HV/LV/ULV sorties.
5.16.9. Aerial Spray Orientation Flying Program. Any mission ready crewmember who has
been selected for initial or recertification training for aerial spray may participate in the aerial
spray orientation program. This is an optional program that allows an individual to fly with
each crew position in order to observe aircrew preflight and in-flight duties and log ―other‖
time. An instructor will accompany each individual. The individual’s supervisor will approve
more than one flight with each crew position. Participation in the aerial spray orientation
program will be terminated upon entry into initial or recertification training.
60 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
5.17. LC-130 Ski Mission Qualification Training. Ski Mission training will qualify and
maintain aircrew qualification for LC-130 Ski Mission polar operations in the Arctic and
Antarctic. This section establishes the minimum training requirements for LC-130
crewmembers. OG/CCs of Ski units may provide additional guidance or clarification in local
training procedures (MAJCOM approval is required if changing policy or guidance in paragraph
5.17 or its subparagraphs).
5.17.1. General.
5.17.1.1. The 109 AW, Stratton ANGB, NY has sole responsibility for LC-130 Ski
Mission operations within the Department of Defense and is the FTU for the Ski Mission
and Celestial and Grid Navigation Training. Training folder reviews for these courses
will be IAW paragraph A2.3.7.2.
5.17.1.2. Waiver Authority. The 109 OG/CC is the waiver authority for Ski Mission
ground and flying continuation training requirements IAW paragraph 1.5.
5.17.1.3. Ski Mission syllabi development, changes, and updates will be prepared by 109
OSF/OST for NGB/A3O approval. NGB/A3O will maintain the master files IAW
paragraph 1.4.
5.17.1.3.1. Operations Group. 109 OG/CC, through the TRP, is the approval
authority for Ski Mission upgrade.
5.17.1.4. In-Unit Training Time Limitations. There are no specified LC-130 difference
time limitations due to limited availability of LC-130s at home station during the unit's
annual 5-month deployment to Antarctica. There are no specified Ski Mission
qualification time limitations due to the seasonal nature of the Ski Mission and
availability of crewmembers to go OCONUS. Ski Mission flying training and
operational flying is accomplished OCONUS only.
5.17.1.5. LC-130 upgrade training will be conducted IAW this chapter and 109 AW
courseware. It is preferred for 109 AW Ski Mission pilots and navigators to complete
operational mission qualification before entering special mission (e.g. polar airdrop or
tactical) qualification or upgrade training. Exceptions require 109 OG/CC or 109
AW/AOO approval. Flight engineers and loadmasters may complete special training in
conjunction with operational mission qualification.
5.17.2. Initial Qualification Training (Phase I)
5.17.2.1. General Requirements. This section establishes minimum training
requirements to qualify as an LC-130 crewmember. Crewmembers will complete C-130
initial qualification ground training requirements IAW paragraph 2.3 of this instruction.
All newly assigned crewmembers will complete LL01 Aircrew Flight Equipment
Familiarization Training and SS01 Local Area Survival prior to their first flight and G002
Aircraft Marshalling Training and Examination IAW Chapter 7.
5.17.2.2. Local 109 AW Initial Qualification Training. All 109 AW crewmembers will
complete training per this AFI and local training procedures.
5.17.2.2.1. 109 AW pilots and navigators normally complete C-130 FTU Phase 1 and
Phase 2 (single ship, visual, low-level airdrop) training. If Phase 2 is not
accomplished at the FTU, pilots will complete assault training and polar airdrop
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 61
training by secondary method. Aircrew completing airdrop training at the FTU will
complete a local familiarization program emphasizing polar airdrop differences to
complete polar airdrop certification. Due to the nature of the Ski Mission, 109 AW
Ski Mission navigators are not required to perform ARAs (N120). 109 AW Ski
Mission navigators will be trained and evaluated for Ski ARAs (XC30).
5.17.2.3. Difference Training. All Difference Training will be completed IAW 109 AW
courseware.
5.17.2.3.1. 109 AW Pilot C-130H2 Difference Training. An instructor pilot will sign
off the student after completion of the syllabus. Crewmembers completing initial C-
130H2 qualification training at the FTU will only require local area familiarization.
If initial C-130H2 flying training is accomplished in-unit, C-130H2 and LC-130
Difference Training may be accomplished concurrently.
5.17.2.3.2. 109 AW Pilot C-130H2 to LC-130 Difference Training. Pilots will
complete a local academic LC-130 difference ground training course. Simulator
training will be accomplished prior to the LC-130 difference flight evaluation. LC-
130 flying training is designed to obtain proficiency in the operation of the aircraft on
normal, hard surface runways. Accomplish LC-130 Difference Training in the L-1
(LC-130H2), L-1A (LC-130H2.5) and L-2 (LC-130H3) aircraft. It is recommended
that approximately half of the flights (minimum of two) are flown in each respective
model (L-1 and L-1A are treated as same model). Pilots require satisfactory
completion of a written difference examination, difference Emergency Procedure
Evaluation (EPE) and a difference SPOT flight evaluation. If initial C-130H2 flying
training is accomplished in-unit, C-130H2 and LC-130 Difference Training may be
accomplished concurrently.
Note: Because of the unpredictable and limited availability of specific model LC aircraft during
the unit’s annual Antarctic deployment, it is allowable for pilots to complete LC-130 Difference
Training in either the L-1 and L-1A or the L-2 aircraft; in this case, after successful completion
of the difference SPOT flight evaluation, pilots will fly supervised in the other LC-130 model
until the two-sortie minimum is completed with all syllabus maneuvers performed to the
satisfaction of an instructor pilot. No additional difference evaluation is required; the IP sign-off
will certify completion of the remaining difference training requirements. These sorties will be
documented in the LC-130 Difference Training grade folder.
5.17.2.3.3. 109 AW Navigator/Flight Engineer/Loadmaster Difference Training. An
Instructor of the same crew position will sign off the student after completion of the
syllabus. Crewmembers will complete a local 109 AW academic difference ground
training course and flying syllabus. If initial C-130H2 flying training is accomplished
in-unit, C-130H2 and LC-130 differences training may be accomplished concurrently.
5.17.3. Mission Qualification Training (Phase II)
5.17.3.1. Ski Mission Ground Training Requirements. Crewmembers will accomplish
ground training under the supervision of a qualified instructor of the same crew position.
All training will be conducted IAW approved Ski Mission syllabi, training guides, and
109 AW instructions.
62 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
5.17.3.1.1. 109 AW flight crew are required to complete initial ski combat offload
training, initial buddy air start training, initial assisted takeoff training, and initial
remote fueling training. Continuation training of these requirements is accomplished
during Ski Tactics (G060S).
5.17.3.1.1.1. 109 AW Remote Fueling Training consists of three phases as
specified in 109 AW courseware. All flight crew will complete Phase I and Phase
II training. Flight engineers, loadmasters, and navigators complete Phase III.
Successful completion of mission qualification certifies completion of training.
5.17.3.1.1.2. 109 AW Assisted Take Off (ATO) training consists of three phases
as specified in 109 AW courseware. Unsupervised ATO operations will not be
conducted until completion of this training. All crewmembers will complete
Phase I training. Aircraft commander, flight engineer, and loadmaster upgrades
will complete Phase II. Aircraft commander and flight engineer upgrades
complete Phase III training, which consists of actual or simulated ATO firing.
The preferred method for completion of Phase III training for aircraft commander
and flight engineer upgrades is for the student to perform an actual firing of ATO
during mission qualification training. However, due to the cost and dwindling
supply of ATO, 109 OSF/OST has created ATO simulation training that fulfills
this requirement if circumstances preclude actual ATO firing during training.
Successful completion of mission qualification certifies completion of this
training.
5.17.3.1.2. Theater Indoctrination Training. 109 OSF/OST will maintain theater
indoctrination training materials to ensure aircrews are trained for specific theater
flight operations in Antarctica and Greenland.
5.17.3.1.3. 109 AW Flight Crew will complete CBRNE Defense Training (G010),
Aircrew Chemical Defense Training (LL04), and Aircrew Chemical Defense Task
Qualification Training (P280) in accordance with Chapter 7 and Table 2.1 of this
AFI. Continuation training for, G010 and LL04 will be a biennial familiarization
class.
5.17.3.2. Ski Mission Flying Training Requirements: Ski Mission flight training is
completed in Greenland or Antarctica; mission considerations make Greenland preferable
for training. All Ski Mission training will be conducted IAW approved Ski Mission
syllabi, training guides, and instructions. Crewmembers will accomplish flight training
under the supervision of a Ski Mission Instructor of the same position. Crewmembers
will normally complete Ski Mission qualification, initial Ski Combat Offload training,
initial Assisted Takeoff training, and initial Remote Fueling training simultaneously.
Grid and Celestial navigation mission qualification (navigators) may also be completed
concurrently with Ski Mission training. Upon successful completion of all required
training items, instructors will recommend the crewmember for a Ski Mission evaluation.
5.17.3.2.1. 109 AW Ski Mission Pilots and MPDs: All pilots will initially qualify as
Ski Mission Copilots. Prerequisites for initial Ski Mission evaluation are a Ski EPE,
a C-130H2 FTU (or secondary method) qualification or difference IP sign-off, a LC-
130 difference flight evaluation, and an assault flight evaluation (FTU evaluation
meets this requirement). A minimum of two ARA approaches will be accomplished
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 63
in weather conditions of 1,000 foot ceiling and 3 miles visibility or lower to complete
Ski Mission qualification.
5.17.3.2.1.1. Ski Mission copilot candidates will not perform pilot flying duties
for ski landings or ski takeoffs, but will demonstrate proficiency in Ski Mission
Copilot (pilot monitoring) duties and will complete a Ski Copilot Mission
evaluation.
5.17.3.2.1.2. Candidates qualifying for Ski Mission Aircraft Commander will
receive instruction while performing pilot flying duties in the left seat and will
complete a Ski Aircraft Commander Mission evaluation in the left seat.
5.17.3.2.2. 109 AW Ski Mission Navigators: Normally, conduct flight training in
conjunction with Ski Missions. Ski ARAs (XC30) for 109 AW navigators are a
mission requirement and will be evaluated accordingly. Accomplish a minimum of
10 Ski ARAs prior to receiving an initial Ski Mission flight evaluation. A
qualification evaluation on Grid and Celestial navigation procedures will be
accomplished prior to an initial Ski Mission evaluation.
5.17.3.2.2.1. Celestial Navigation Qualification Training. Accomplish ground
and flying training according to 109 AW courseware. Complete Celestial
navigation ground training prior to mission qualification training. A minimum of
two Celestial sorties will be flown prior to qualification. One of these training
legs may be accomplished on a Celestial Training Device.
5.17.3.2.2.2. Grid Navigation Qualification Training. Accomplish ground and
flying training according to 109 AW courseware. Complete Grid navigation
ground training prior to mission qualification training. A minimum of one flight
using Grid navigation procedures will be accomplished in the aircraft.
5.17.3.2.3. 109 AW Ski Mission Flight Engineers: Complete flight training in
conjunction with Ski Missions and according to 109AW courseware to include actual
ski takeoff and landing operations.
5.17.3.2.4. 109 AW Ski Mission Loadmasters: Complete flight training in
conjunction with Ski Missions and according to 109 AW courseware to include a
demonstration directing on/off loading operations on a snow surface with the aircraft
on skis.
5.17.3.2.5. 109 AW Ski Mission Instructors/Evaluators. Ski Mission Instructor Pilot
candidates will be selected from among qualified instructor/evaluator pilots and will
be experienced in all phases of Ski Mission operations. Prior to certifying
instructor/evaluator pilots in the Ski Mission, instructor and evaluator candidates will
receive training that includes ground and flight qualification requirements. Ground
training will emphasize emergency procedures, hazards of polar flying, required crew
coordination, and CRM and ORM principles. All other crew positions may be
certified as Ski Mission Instructors/Evaluators following initial Instructor/Evaluator
qualification.
5.17.3.2.6. Polar Airdrop. 109 AW flight crewmembers will be selected through the
TRP process for Polar Airdrop training. In-unit training will be IAW formal school
64 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
and 109 AW courseware. New 109 AW pilots and navigators currently airdrop
qualified require one day and one night local orientation flight as a minimum prior to
instructor sign-off.
5.17.3.3. Tactical Mission Qualification Training. When not completed at the FTU,
tactical training normally begins after Ski Mission Qualification Training for selected 109
AW pilots and navigators. 109 AW flight crewmembers will be selected through the TRP
process for tactical training which includes day and NVG single-ship, visual low-level
CDS airdrop. In-unit ground and flying training will be via secondary method IAW
formal school and 109 AW courseware. Newly assigned 109 AW pilots and navigators
who are day and NVG single-ship, visual low-level airdrop qualified require one day
visual low-level orientation flight to an airdrop and one NVG visual low-level sortie to an
NVG airdrop as a minimum prior to instructor sign-off.
5.17.3.4. Assault Qualification Training: When not completed at the FTU, assault
training begins after C-130H2 Difference Training. Assault qualified, newly assigned
109 AW pilots require a minimum of one day and one night local orientation flight in a
C-130H2 aircraft, with an IP sign off, prior to aircraft commander certification. Pilots
require an assault flight evaluation, if not already qualified, prior to aircraft commander
certification.
5.17.4. Continuation Training. This section outlines continuation ground and flying training
requirements for Ski Mission qualified crewmembers. 109 OSF/OST maintains definitions
of all ―X‖ events and ―S‖ suffix courses listed in Tables 5.6, 5.7, 5.8 and 5.9.
5.17.4.1. Flying and ground training events for the 109 AW will be tracked in the ARMS
database IAW Tables 5.6, 5.7, 5.8 and 5.9. OG/CC may publish in local training
procedures any MAJCOM-approved changes to these tables.
5.17.4.2. Ski Mission qualified crewmembers of the 109 AW will maintain the
requirements of Tables 5.6, 5.7, 5.8, and 5.9 with the exception of Tactical Events.
5.17.4.3. Tactical qualified crewmembers of the 109 AW will maintain all requirements
of Tables 5.6, 5.7, 5.8, and 5.9 Failure to complete Tactical ground or flying training
requirements does not impact MR status for the Ski Mission.
5.17.4.4. Ski Mission items cannot be credited in the simulator. For other events see
paragraph 4.5.3.2 (referencing Tables 5.8 and 5.9) for crediting events in a simulator.
5.17.4.5. Grid Profile. This event uses a Grid reference system for aircraft steering and
should continue for at least a 2-hour period. Navigators may credit a Grid event on a
Category I or II route. Grid profiles may also be logged as a navigational profile if
requirements are met.
5.17.4.6. Due to the Antarctic season, 109 AW training year is defined as follows:
Flying and Ground Training Annual Period: 1 Apr – 31 Mar
Flying Semi-Annual Training Periods: 1 Apr – 30 Sep and 1 Oct – 31 Mar.
5.17.4.7. Multiple Qualifications. C-130H2 and LC-130s only require initial Difference
Training (no difference currency).
5.17.4.8. Failure to Complete Ground Training Events.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 65
5.17.4.8.1. Comply with restrictions and requirements described in paragraph 4.9.3
by referencing LC-130 events listed in Tables 5.6 (for Table 4.1 references) and
Table 5.7 for (Table 4.2 references).
5.17.4.8.2. OG/CC waivers for events in Tables 5.6 and 5.7 will comply with
paragraph 4.9.3.4.
5.17.4.9. Crewmembers NMR for Flying Training Events.
5.17.4.9.1. NMR crewmembers will comply with restrictions and requirements
described in paragraph 4.9.4 by referencing LC-130 events listed in Tables 5.8 and
5.9.
5.17.4.9.2. NMR for Ski Mission events does not affect other missions. Overdue
flying training requirements in Tactical, Polar Airdrop, NVG or Assault requirements
do not restrict crewmembers from flying the Ski Mission. Conversely, due to the
seasonal nature of the Ski Mission, overdue flying training requirements in the Ski
Mission do not restrict crewmembers from flying other missions and do not restrict
crewmembers from going OCONUS. Ski Mission flying can only be accomplished
OCONUS.
Table 5.6. LC-130 Ground Continuation Training Requirements.
Code Event Position Frequency Notes
Flight Physical All A 1, 10
Physiological Training All 60m 1, 10
G060 Tactics All A 4, 5, 6, 8
G060S Ski Tactics All A 4, 5, 8
G070 Aircrew Intelligence All A 4, 5, 8, 10
G080 Communications Procedures P, N 365d 4, 5, 6, 7, 10
G080S Ski Communications Procedures P, N 365d 4, 5, 7, 10
G090 Anti-hijacking All T 4, 8, 10
G130 Instrument Refresher Course P, N See Note 2 2, 10
G150 Approach Plate Familiarization Course E B 8
G182 Hazardous Cargo Training AC T 4, 5, 8, 10
G182A Hazardous Cargo Training L 24m 8, 10
G220 Flight Engineer Systems Refresher E A 3, 8
G230 CRM Refresher All A 8, 10, 11
G602 Loadmaster Refresher Training L A 3, 5, 8
LL03 Egress Training, Non-Ejection All T 1, 10
66 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
LL06 Aircrew Flight Equipment All A/R 8, 9, 10
NV03 NVG Ground Refresher Training All A 8, 10, 12
SS02 Combat SERE Training All 36m 4, 5, 8
SS05 Water Survival Training All 36m 4, 5, 8
SS06 Emergency Parachuting Training (EPT) All 36m 4, 5, 8
A-Annual, B-Biennial, T-Triennial, m-due in number of months, d-due in number of days,
A/R-As required
NOTES: 1. Mandatory grounding item on expiration date; individual will not fly until required training is
accomplished. Flight physical expires on the last day of the birth month. Flight physical and
physiological training are independently tracked via the crewmember’s Individual Training
Summary (ITS) and thus do not require an ARMS code. If units want to track in ARMS, use
G005 and G006 per Chapter 7.
2. Log IRC upon completion of the complete course to include instructor-led Hot Topics. Pilots
and Navigators on active flying status will complete the IRC every fourth quarter after
completion IAW AFMAN 11-210.
3. G220 incorporates hostile environment repair and G602 incorporates Loadmaster Aerial
Delivery (LAD) for Polar Airdrop and Tactical qualified loadmasters.
4. Not required for Senior Officer Course graduates.
5. Not required for BAQ crewmembers.
6. Required only for Tactical qualified crewmembers.
7. OG/CCs may approve an extension of up to six months for aircrews.
8. The OG/CC is the waiver authority for this event. See paragraph 4.9.3.4.
9. Aircrew Flight Equipment Training (LL06) should be accomplished in conjunction with SS02,
LL03 and SS05. See event description in Chapter 7.
10. AFI 11-2C-130v1 is not the governing directive for completion of this event. IAW AFI 11-
202v1, refer to HQ AF/A3O-AT reference publications for current ancillary training frequencies.
11. Crewmembers completing refresher simulator can take credit for G230, CRM Refresher.
12. For NVG certified crewmembers only. Crewmembers who are overdue NV03 may fly
unsupervised on missions not requiring NVG use.
Table 5.7. LC-130 Mobility Training Requirements.
Code Event Position Frequency Notes
C040 Mobility Folder Review All A/R 1, 2, 5, 7
E030 Passport All A/R
E035 Secondary Passport All A/R
G120 ISOPREP Review All 180d 1, 2, 7
G280 Small Arms Training P, N 48m 2, 7
G280 Small Arms Training E, L 24m 7
LL04 Aircrew Chemical Defense Training All B 1, 2, 5, 6
LL04S Ski Aircrew Chemical Defense Training All B 1, 2, 4, 5, 7
SS03 Conduct After Capture All 36m 1, 2, 5, 6
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 67
SS07 Contingency SERE Indoctrination All A/R 1, 2, 5, 6
XC99 Remote Refuel Refresher All A 3
XCWB Cold Weather Survival Refresher All B 8
A-Annual, B-Biennial, T-Triennial, A/R-As required, m-due in number of months
NOTES:
1. Not required for BAQ crewmembers.
2. Not required for Senior Officer Course graduates.
3. All crew positions shall accomplish academic refresher training annually. Ref: Hot
Refueling Certification letter dated 31 Oct 1991.
4. Continuation training for LL04S will be a biennial familiarization class. See paragraph
5.17.3.1.3.
5. The OG/CC is the waiver authority for this event. See paragraph 4.9.3.4.
6. Required only for Tactical qualified crewmembers.
7. Failure to complete this event does not affect MR status but restricts crewmember from
performing missions that require the delinquent event until the required training is accomplished.
8. XCWB may be taught in conjunction with LL03.
Table 5.8. LC-130 Semi-Annual Continuation Flying Requirements (Pilots, Navigator).
Code Event Aircraft Commander MPD Pilot /Copilot Navigator Notes
Proficiency/Basic Events A B C E CUR A B C CUR A B C E CUR
M010 Proficiency Sortie 1 1 1 1 2 2 4 6 6 3 45d 1, 9, 13,
14
G250 Refresher Simulator 1 1 1 1 2
G600S Ski Navigator Refresher Training 1 1 1 1 2
P020 Takeoff 8 10 12 6 M 8 10 12 M 1, 9
P028 Right-Seat Takeoff 2 3 3 Q 3, 9
P029 Left-Seat Takeoff 2 3 3 Q 3, 9
P190 Landing 8 10 12 6 M 8 10 12 M 1, 9
P198 Right-Seat Landing 2 3 3 Q 3, 9
P199 Left-Seat Landing 2 3 3 Q 3, 9
P192 Unaided Night Landing 2 2 2 Q 2 2 2 Q 9
P070 Instrument Approach 6 8 12 6 M 6 8 12 M 1, 9
P100 Precision 3 4 6 2 3 4 6 9
P110 Non-precision 3 4 6 1 3 4 6 9
P116 NDB / VOR 1 1 1 1 1 1 9
P130 Circling 1 2 2 1 2 2 9
Assault Events A B C E CUR A B C CUR A B C E CUR
AS09 Assault Takeoff 6 8 10 2 4 4 8
AS11 Assault Landing 8 10 12 Q 2 4 4 8
AS12 Unaided Night Assault Landing 1 1 2 1 1 2 8, 12
AS21 Heavyweight Assault 2 2 4 8
68 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Ski Mission Events A B C E CUR A B C CUR A B C E CUR
XC20 Ski Takeoff 5 5 5 5 5 5 2
XC40 Ski Landing 5 5 5 5 5 5 2
XC30 Ski ARA 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2, 4
XCRF Remote Fueling Actual 1 1 1 180d 1 1 1 180d 1 1 1 180d 5
Polar Airdrop Events A B C E CUR A B C CUR A B C E CUR
XD04 Polar CDS Airdrop 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 3 6
XDAC Polar CDS Actual 1 1 1
XDPR Polar CDS Route 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 3
Navigation Events A B C E CUR A B C CUR A B C E CUR
X012 Day Celestial Sortie 1 1 1 2, 7
B014 Category I Navigation Sortie 1 1 1 2, 7
GD09 Grid Sortie 1 1 1 2, 7
NVG Events A B C E CUR A B C CUR A B C E CUR
NV47 NVG Takeoff 2 4 6 2 2 2 8, 16
NV48 NVG Landing 2 4 6 Q 2 2 2 Q 8, 16
NV80 NVG Instrument Approach 1 1 2 1 1 2 9, 16
NV05 NVG Airland Event 2 4 6 7, 16
Other Mission Events A B C E CUR A B C CUR A B C E CUR
NV50 NVG Assault Takeoff 1 2 2 1 2 2 8, 10
NV49 NVG Assault Landing 2 2 4 Q 1 2 2 8, 10
NV00 VLL NVG Event 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 7, 10, 15
NV18 NVG Airdrop 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 7, 10
RS06 High-Altitude Arrival 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7, 10
RS16 Low-Altitude Arrival 1 3 3 1 3 3 1 3 3 7, 10
RS26 High-Altitude Departure 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7, 10
RS36 Low-Altitude Departure 1 3 3 1 3 3 1 3 3 7, 10
RS46 Penetration/Rapid Descent 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7, 10
VL01 VLL Day Event 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 7, 10, 15
VL30 High to Low Alt Transition 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2, 7, 10
AD04 CDS Airdrop 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 7, 10, 15
AD06 Visual Airdrop 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 7, 10, 15
AD09 Medium/High Altitude Airdrop 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2, 7, 10
AD10 PADS Airdrop 1 1 1 2, 7, 10
AD11 PADS Operator (Unguided) 1 1 2 1 1 2 7, 10
AD12 PADS Operator (Guided) 1 1 1 1 1 1 2, 10
FE09 Optical Threat Event 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 7, 10
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 69
FE19 IR Threat Event 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 7, 10
P260 Have Quick Event 1 2 2 1 2 2 7, 10
P270 Secure Voice Event 1 2 2 1 2 2 7, 10, 11
G600 Navigator Refresher Training 1 1 1 1 2, 10
N120 Airborne Radar Approach (ARA) 2 2 4 7, 9, 10
Miscellaneous Events A B C E CUR A B C CUR A B C E CUR
P280 ACDTQT 7, 17
NOTES: T-Triennial, B-Biennial, A-Annual, M-Monthly, Q-Quarterly, d-due in number of
days.
1. Unqualified in the aircraft if non-current in excess of 6 months.
2. All events in this row will be completed annually. OG/CC is waiver authority.
3. MPD pilots only. See paragraph 4.5.3.1 for further discussion of left-seat and right-seat
flying.
4. Due to the nature of the Ski Mission, non-tactical qualified 109 AW Navigators do not
complete standard ARAs (N120).
5. Crewmembers scheduled for remote fueling operations who have not performed an actual
remote fueling within 180 days shall re-accomplish academic refresher training. Ref: Hot
Refueling Certification letter dated 31 Oct 1991.
6. May log with successful drop of either actual CDS or SATB-C.
7. May log 50% (Rounded up; 100% if requirement is 1) in any USAF-certified WST (does not
have to be Level C or better). See paragraph 4.5.3.2 for ARMS tracking guidance.
Crewmembers can maintain and regain currency for any event that may be 100% accomplished
in the simulator. Navigators may credit Proficiency/Basic Events and Navigation Events in the
SNS, WST or CTD. Navigators may credit all other events in the WST.
8. May log 50% (Rounded up; 100% if requirement is 1) in a Level C or better WST or Satellite
Navigation Station. See paragraph 4.5.3.2 for ARMS tracking guidance. Crewmembers can
maintain and regain currency for any event that may be 100% accomplished in the simulator.
9. May log 100% in a Level C or better WST or Satellite Navigation Station. See paragraph
4.5.3.2 for ARMS tracking guidance. Crewmembers can maintain and regain currency in the
simulator.
10. Required only for Tactical qualified crewmembers.
11. P270 may be logged when communicating with any other station, including another radio on
the same aircraft.
12. Quarterly currency for Unaided Night Assault Landing (AS12) is not required for pilots who
maintain NVG Assault Landing (NV49) qualification and currency.
13. Navigators may maintain and regain currency in any WST or Satellite Navigation Station.
For navigators, Note 7 also applies to this event.
14. MAJCOM and NAF navigators require one proficiency sortie every 90 days. For all
navigators, currency will expire at the end of the calendar month.
15. XD04 and XDAC will also be credited when all requirements for AD04 and AD06 are met.
XDPR will also be credited when requirements for NV00 or VL01 are met.
16. Required only for NVG qualified crewmembers.
17. P280 is Triennial for FTL A, Biennial for FTL B, and Annual for FTL C. Not required for
FTL E crewmembers.
70 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Table 5.9. LC-130 E
Code Event Flight Engineer Loadmaster Notes
Basic/Proficiency Events A B C CUR A B C CUR
M010 Proficiency Sortie 4 6 6 45d 4 6 6 45d 1, 6
G250 Refresher Simulator 1 1 1 2
Ski Mission Events A B C CUR A B C CUR
XC50 Ski Sortie 2 3 3 1 1 3 2
XCRF Remote Fueling Actual 1 1 1 180d 1 1 1 180d 2, 3
Polar Airdrop Events A B C CUR A B C CUR
XDAC Polar CDS Actual 1 1 2
XD00 Basic Polar Airdrop Event 2 2 2
NVG Events A B C CUR A B C CUR
NV02 NVG Event 1 1 2 1 1 2 4, 6, 7
NV05 NVG Airland Event 2 2 4 6, 7
Tactical Events A B C CUR A B C CUR
AD01 Basic Airdrop Event 3 3 3 6, 8
AD04 CDS Airdrop 1 1 2 8
AD09 Medium/High Altitude Airdrop 1 1 1 1 1 1 2, 6, 8
AD10 PADS Airdrop 1 1 1 2, 8
M050 Tactical Mission 3 4 6 3 4 6 6, 8
RS46 Penetration/Rapid Descent 1 1 1 6, 8
FE09 Optical Threat Event 1 1 1 1 1 1 2, 6, 8
FE19 IR Threat Event 1 1 1 1 1 1 2, 6, 8
Miscellaneous Events A B C CUR A B C CUR
P280 ACDTQT 6, 9
NOTES: T-Triennial, B-Biennial, A-Annual, d-due in number of days.
1. MAJCOM and NAF engineers and loadmasters require one proficiency sortie every 90 days.
For all crewmembers, currency will expire at the end of the calendar month. Unqualified in the
aircraft if non-current in excess of 6 months.
2. All events in this row will be completed annually. OG/CC is waiver authority.
3. Crewmembers scheduled for remote fueling operations who have not performed an actual
remote fueling within 180 days shall re-accomplish academic refresher training. Ref: Hot
Refueling Certification letter dated 31 Oct 1991.
4. For FTL A crewmembers, training requirement is one event due annually.
5. Tactical qualified loadmasters may dual log XDAC when all requirements for AD04 are met.
6. Flight engineers may log 50% (Rounded up; 100% if requirement is 1) in any USAF-certified
WST (does not have to be Level C or better). See paragraph 4.5.3.2 for ARMS tracking
guidance. Flight engineers can maintain and regain currency in the simulator.
7. Required only for NVG qualified crewmembers.
8. Required only for Tactical qualified crewmembers.
9. P280 is Triennial for FTL A, Biennial for FTL B, and Annual for FTL C.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 71
Chapter 6
AIRCREW TRAINING SYSTEM (ATS)
6.1. Description. The C-130 ATS is a contractor-provided aircrew training system. The ATS
contractor provides academic and simulator training. The Air Force conducts all flight training
and administers all evaluations. The ATS contract guarantees trained students meet government
standards.
6.2. Applicability. As defined in AFI 11-202v1.
6.2.1. Purpose: C-130 ATS is a system of academics, Aircrew Training Device (ATD)
sessions, and ground and flight training phases. This system provides qualification, upgrade,
and continuation training to attain and maintain appropriate qualification for C-130
crewmembers and maintenance engine run technicians. The ATS contractor provides
training courseware and all academic and ATD instruction. US Air Force provides all flight
instruction.
6.2.2. Goal. The goal of the ATS program is to optimize aircrew training through the
integrated use of academics, ATD, and flightline C-130 aircraft instruction. The C-130 ATS
establishes performance requirements in the ATS Statement of Work (SOW) and system
specification. The ATS master task listing (MTL), standards of evaluation (SOE), objective
media analysis report (OMAR), and media selection syllabus report (MSSR) products help
define C-130 course content, standards, and media selected for each task and objective,
respectively.
6.3. Dedicated Training Time. As defined in AFI 11-202v1.
6.3.1. Applies to formal school and continuation training. It is imperative that students
complete training in a timely and uninterrupted manner. Students will enroll on a full-time
basis. Relieve students of duties not directly related to training. EXCEPTION: Senior
Officer Course (SOC) students may continue their normal duties as time permits.
6.4. ATS Course Prerequisites. ATS course prerequisites are listed in Table 5.1 and the
appropriate syllabus. Each ATS course is designed and based on student prerequisites being met.
Prerequisites may include, but are not limited to, a minimum number of flying hours, squadron
operations officer recommendation, and completion of applicable courseware.
6.5. Lesson Objectives: Instructors and evaluators use lesson objectives as a reference
document to establish training and evaluation standards.
6.5.1. Master Task List (MTL) and Standards of Evaluation (SOE) Purpose: MTL and SOE
provide the basis for ATS courseware development, and are a principle source for evaluation
criteria (validate C-130 crewmember performance).
6.5.1.1. Courseware developers, flight examiners, and instructors who train C-130
crewmembers should use criteria in these documents to help determine the ability of an
individual to meet performance levels required to be mission-qualified. For evaluation,
use AFI 11-2C-130v2 criteria.
72 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
6.5.1.2. Conduct the Air Force evaluation to SOE standards, in a timely manner
subsequent to the trainee’s completion of the ground-based or flight training (to guarantee
standards).
6.5.2. The ATS contractor provides opportunities for Air Force flight instructors to observe
trainee progress in ATDs. Likewise, ATS instructors may observe the trainee’s aircraft
flights. In some cases, ATS courseware may state these specific occurrences. Every
reasonable effort should be made to ensure this type of interface continues at each main
operating base (MOB).
6.5.3. Crew Resource Management (CRM) training. CRM trains crewmembers to cope with
potential problems in human behavior affecting crew performance. CRM is presented on a
recurring basis throughout the C-130 ATS. Introduction to CRM is presented during initial
qualification training (IQT) and is imbedded in recurring phase training.
6.6. Unsatisfactory Student Progress. If a student's training progress is unsatisfactory, the
contractor will notify the government representative (wing training, operations officer, etc.).
Following review of the student's record, the government representative will determine whether
to continue or terminate training. See formal course syllabus or MAJCOM policy for further
guidance.
6.6.1. The contractor will provide written feedback to the training unit commander for
students who display substandard performance.
6.6.2. Remediation Procedures. ATS contractor and Project Officer (PO) or Quality
Assurance Representative (QAR) will receive prompt notification of failed flight evaluations
culminating an ATS course. Local procedures will ensure notification is completed within
24 hours of failure for local evaluations and within 24 hours after return to home station for
off-station evaluations. Remediation subsequent to a failed flight evaluation may be the ATS
contractor’s responsibility, Air Force’s responsibility, or a joint responsibility, depending on
the nature of failure. In every case, close coordination is required to achieve maximum
trainee progress. Direct contact with appropriate ATS instructor supervisor is encouraged.
6.6.2.1. Remediation Scheduling:
6.6.2.1.1. When a trainee is required to return for remediation regarding deficient
areas, the trainee’s unit, appropriate wing or group training office, and ATS training
manager will coordinate training start and completion dates.
6.6.2.1.2. The ATS contractor will contact the trainee’s flight commander if a trainee
is identified, during ATS contractor’s instruction, to need remediation or additional
training. If ATS contractor determines no further amount of remediation or
additional instruction will result in the individual attaining required MTL or SOE
proficiency level, contractor will expeditiously inform trainee’s flight commander and
wing or group training office verbally and follow-up in writing. At minimum, the Air
Force ATS PO/QAR will receive a courtesy copy of this documentation. Air Force
will review ATS contractor documentation and recommendations regarding trainee
performance. Air Force will determine whether or not to continue any further
training for that trainee, using ATS instruction, or otherwise terminate all training.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 73
6.7. Courseware Changes. Changes to ATS courseware, including MTL and SOE, may be
proposed by any C-130 crewmember. Complete recommended change on ATS contractor’s
change proposal form and submit to the local PO/QAR. Change proposals will be sent through
wing or group training and ATS PO/QAR offices to 714 TRS at Little Rock AFB. The 714 TRS
will coordinate with the ATS contractor and the originator and will provide feedback to reflect
action taken. Change proposal forms are available from the ATS contractor training manager at
each site.
6.8. Scheduling:
6.8.1. General. Local procedures will be developed at each main operating base (MOB) for
scheduling ATS trainees. MOB wing or group training offices will ensure procedures
minimize schedule changes and turbulence.
6.8.2. Enrollment. Enrollment for all ATS courses (upgrade and continuation) will be
accomplished through the wing or group training office (appropriate ARC chain-of-command
for ARC upgrades). Names and other personal data required by ATS contractor will be
passed to the ATS scheduler not later than the time established by host wing or group
training office.
6.8.3. Class Surging. Class surging will be coordinated between MAJCOMs due to
relationships of the many ATS resources. Refer to the ATS contract class capacity
allowances.
6.8.4. Class Size. Annual throughput for specific ATS courses is established in the ATS
contract. The AETC PFT document reflects formal school throughput based on Air Force
requirements and what is authorized by contract. If the contract throughput for any MOB
(formal school or otherwise) will be exceeded, HQ AMC/A3T will coordinate those
requirements through appropriate Air Force and ATS contractor channels. In conjunction
with their PO or QAR office, wing or group training offices will monitor annual throughput
(current or projected) according to their MOB ATS authorized throughput and notify HQ
AMC/A3T of differences either above or below what is authorized in the contract.
6.8.4.1. The ATS contractor establishes class sizes for individual courses. Every attempt
will be made by MOB wing or group training office to ensure all classes are filled before
requesting secondary method.
6.8.4.2. ATS training at alternate sites. The ATS contractor determines the required
number of ATS instructors and resources needed to accommodate annual throughput.
Projected annual throughput is based on Air Force manpower data, which includes
assigned, on-loan, and attached active duty as well as designated ARC and other units
specified to be trained at that MOB. Trainee scheduling at a particular MOB should be
kept within the units designated for that MOB. If a unit is unable to complete their
requirements at a designated site, units may receive training at another site with prior
coordination between the unit and the site.
6.8.5. Cancellations. Deletions from the ATS schedule will vary at each training site
because of training courses offered and the impact to scheduling. Continued cancellations
will greatly impact the overall annual training plan, and the contractor may be unable to
accommodate the original, planned throughput.
74 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
6.8.5.1. Cancellation procedures will be developed at each MOB between contractor and
wing training.
6.8.5.2. Cancellation for ATS formal school courses. According to ETCA, HQ
AETC/A3R must be notified 45-days before a formal school start date if a course
allocation cancellation or no-fill is pending. This suspense should enable the class quota
to be reallocated. Formal school cancellations will be made not later than 30-days before
class start date, due to the impact of scheduling changes on the PFT. EXCEPTION:
Emergency leave. HQ AETC/A3R will remove quotas and either reallocate or cancel
affected quota or class.
6.8.6. Wing Option Time. ATS contractor is required to provide Air Force use of training
equipment at each site. Amount of time varies by site. Use of this time for other than
SIMCERT is at the discretion of the OG/CC, and the time will be coordinated through wing
or group training office channels. Contractor will provide a minimum of an ATD operator
during this option time. If an Air Force instructor is required in lieu of an ATS instructor, the
Air Force instructor will provide the ATD operator with a lesson plan or outline prior to
entering the ATD. The Air Force instructor will not operate the ATD. Units will normally
provide either an Air Force instructor or a clearly defined scenario for crews utilizing option
time for training.
6.8.7. ATS Course Prerequisites. ATS courses may require trainee preparation before class
start. If required, the prerequisites are an integral portion of the course and will be
accomplished to receive course completion credit. Prerequisites may consist of reviewing
study references, quizzes, performance data preparation, workbooks, etc. Required
prerequisites are described in the appropriate student training guide or syllabus. When
required, ATS contractor will ensure student training guides and workbooks are distributed to
units in time for prerequisite completion. Failure to complete the prerequisites will disrupt
the scheduled training and, in some cases, may result in dismissal from the course.
6.8.8. Late or No-Show. Course completion credit may be withheld when trainee tardiness
interferes with class training. For WST and cockpit procedures trainer (CPT) sessions,
tardiness is defined as 15 minutes after mission briefing time. Those classes, which cannot
be conducted without the late trainee's presence, will be canceled at the 30-minute point (e.g.,
a WST session with pilot no-show will be canceled if the mission cannot be effectively
conducted). While ATS contractor personnel are not required to substitute for missing or late
crewmembers, contractor personnel may fill a crew position per existing contractor /
government agreements.
6.8.9. Crew Complement for Refresher Training. Units will normally schedule a qualifed
crew (aircraft commander, copilot, flight engineer, and navigator) to attend refresher training.
On a case-by-case basis, units may schedule other than a normal crew complement subject to
advance coordination with the contractor. Advance coordination is very important since the
contractor is not required to provide training unless the crew composition complies with the
contract or current agreements. In most cases, the contractor will provide training but does
not have to issue completion certificates for other than normal crew complement. In that
case, units will determine if training received met training requirements for annual refresher
training and allow the crew to credit the event.
6.9. Administration:
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 75
6.9.1. ATS Feedback
6.9.1.1. Air Force-appointed ATS PO and/or QAR (PO/QAR) are primary focal points
and the liaison agency between the Air Force and the ATS contractor. POs and/or QARs
are the only Air Force personnel empowered to evaluate any component of contract
compliance. These individuals are entrusted with quality assurance, are the only
appropriate office (unit-level) to direct contractor to perform or stop work via the
Administrative Contracting Officer (ACO)/Principal Contracting Officer (PCO)
direction, and are accountable for these actions. Each wing or group commander will
establish ATS PO and QAR positions and enforce directives, requirements, and
procedures established by Department of Defense (DoD) and MAJCOM directives and
publications. ATS POs and QARs will maintain a current copy of the ATS contract(s),
designated quality assurance regulations and directives, and quality assurance procedures.
6.9.1.2. Operational Evaluation. The ATS contractor is required to evaluate the ATS
program and its graduates’ on-the-job performance. The objective of this ongoing
―operational evaluation‖ is to assure the ATS produces qualified graduates. The
contractor’s system will ensure a steady flow of information to maintain quality,
effectiveness, and currency in the ATS. Revisions to the ATS will be based on this
information.
6.9.1.3. Feedback includes inputs from graduates, flight commanders (or designated
representatives), and evaluators. Analysis of actual performance (Air Force evaluation)
and trainee critique data help to determine if graduates’ on-the-job performance meets
MTL and established performance standards. The importance of this on-the-job
performance feedback from graduates, flight commanders, and evaluators cannot be
overemphasized. This data is vital to establishing a database to identify trends and
support revisions to the ATS.
6.9.2. ATS Data Collection. Internal and external data will be collected, reported, and
corrective actions taken according to approved operation evaluation plan.
6.10. Aircraft Flights for ATS Training Instructors.
6.10.1. The ATS contractor provides opportunity for Air Force flight instructors to observe
trainee progress in ATDs. Likewise, the terms and conditions of the current government
contract allow ATS instructors to observe the trainee's aircraft flights. In some cases, ATS
courseware may state these specific occurrences. Every reasonable effort should be made to
ensure this type of interface continues at each training site.
6.10.2. Contractor Personnel Flight Operations. Contractors may fly on a non-interference
basis, in accordance with the terms and conditions of the current government contract.
6.11. C-130 ATS Facility Tours.
6.11.1. Wing training offices will coordinate all requests for C-130 ATS facility tours with
the contractor as soon as possible, but in no case later than 24-hours before the planned
event. This may require close coordination with public affairs and protocol. Air Force
option time may be used at the discretion of the OG/CC. Tours will be on an as-available
basis and will not displace scheduled training events.
76 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
6.11.2. OG/CC will ensure an Air Force representative meets, greets, accompanies, and
conducts all tours. The contractor is not manned for or on contract to perform these duties.
The contractor is responsible for providing an aircrew training device operator only.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 77
Chapter 7
ARMS IDENTIFIERS
7.1. Description. Event Identifiers and Descriptions.
Table 7.1. ARMS Identifiers.
Identifier Group Paragraph
A Academic training 7.2
AA USAF-Specified 7.3
AD Airdrop 7.4
AS Assault 7.5
B Navigation & Individual Proficiency 7.6
C Miscellaneous 7.7
E Miscellaneous 7.7
FE Miscellaneous 7.7
FR Formation Departure & Recovery 7.8
G Ground Training 7.9
GD Navigation & Individual Proficiency 7.6
LL Aircrew Flight Equipment 7.10
M Mission Specific 7.11
N Navigation & Individual Proficiency 7.6
NV NVG 7.12
P Proficiency 7.13
Q Qualification 7.14
RS Airland Approaches / Departures 7.15
SK SKE 7.16
SP Special Certification 7.17
SS SERE 7.18
V Global Ready Aircraft Commander 7.19
VL Visual Low Level 7.20
VT Visual Threat Recognition & Avoidance 7.21
X Unit Defined 7.22
7.2. Academic Training Identifiers.
7.2.1. A001 Initial Qualification Academic Course
7.2.2. A002 Aircraft Commander Upgrade Qualification Academic Course (ACA)
78 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
7.2.3. A004 Senior Staff Qualification Course
7.2.4. A010 Instructor Academic Training
7.2.5. A017 Regulation/Directive Knowledge/Use
7.2.6. A018 Aircraft Commander Responsibilities
7.2.7. A034 Requalification Course
7.2.8. A060 Flight Examiner Course
7.3. USAF-Specified Training Events. AA01 Qualification Evaluation
AA11 Instrument Evaluation
AA21 Combined Qualification / Instrument Evaluation
7.4. Airdrop (AD) Events. Log an airdrop event when a successful airdrop is accomplished
(see Attachment 4). Pilots and flight engineers may log actual loads or training bundles. See
event descriptions for further guidance. Both pilots may credit the airdrop event.
7.4.1. Employment Altitudes. These definitions are separate from the altitude definitions in
AFTTP 3-1.GP, which are not applicable to C-130 training. In the event of overlap (e.g.,
more than 10,000' MSL, but less than 3000' AGL due to mountainous terrain), use the most
logical category for the type of airdrop being flown, and procedures being used. See AFI 11-
2C-130v3, AFTTP 3-3.C-130, and AFI 11-231, Computed Air Release Point Procedures, for
additional information on employment altitudes. Use the following altitude definitions:
7.4.1.1. Very Low Altitude. Surface to 999' above ground level (AGL). Used for many
drops.
7.4.1.2. Low Altitude. 1000' AGL to 2499' AGL. Used for many drops.
7.4.1.3. Medium Altitude. 2500' AGL to 9,999' MSL. Typically used for I-
CDS/JPADS, HALO, HAHO, and other types of drops but has no special oxygen
requirements. See AFI 11-231 for minimum HALO/HAHO altitudes.
7.4.1.4. High Altitude. 10,000' MSL to 17,999' MSL. Airdrops conducted at these
altitudes have special oxygen requirements. See AFI 11-202v3, General Flight Rules,
and AFI 11-2C-130v3.
7.4.1.5. Very High Altitude. 18,000' MSL and above. Airdrops conducted at these
altitudes have special oxygen requirements, including pre-breathing. See AFI 11-202v3
and AFI 11-2C-130v3.
AD01 Basic Airdrop Event
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready crewmembers.
Description: See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3 for airdrop (including SATB-H)
procedures.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 79
Additional Information: Flight engineers may log this event when all enroute and airdrop
checklist are accomplished. In the event of a planned or unplanned no-drop condition, the
aircraft commander will determine if sufficient events were accomplished to credit this event.
AD03 Equipment/SATB-H
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready crewmembers.
Description: See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3 for equipment airdrop (including
SATB-H) procedures.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: Loadmasters log this event when an actual heavy equipment load is
loaded, rigged, all checklists through the slowdown checklist are accomplished, and there is not a
no-drop condition due to either loadmaster. Navigators will log this event when an actual heavy
equipment airdrop is successfully completed. If a planned or unplanned no-drop condition
occurs after the slow-down checklist is completed, aircraft commanders will determine if enough
training was accomplished for pilots to credit the event.
AD04 Containerized Delivery System / SATB-C
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready crewmembers.
Description: See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3 for CDS airdrop (including
SATB-C) procedures.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: Loadmasters log this event when an actual CDS bundle is loaded,
rigged, all checklists through the slowdown checklist are accomplished, and there is not a no-
drop condition due to either loadmaster. Navigators will log this event when an actual CDS
bundle is successfully airdropped. If a planned or unplanned no-drop condition occurs after the
slow-down checklist is completed, aircraft commanders will determine if enough training was
accomplished for pilots to credit the event.
AD05 Personnel / SATB-P Airdrop
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready crewmembers.
Description: See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3 for personnel airdrop procedures.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: Loadmasters log this event only when actual personnel are loaded,
rigged, all checklists through the slowdown checklist are accomplished, and there is not a no-
80 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
drop condition due to either loadmaster. Use AD05A for actual airdrops. Navigators will log
successful actual personnel or training bundle drops (see Table 4.4). If a planned or unplanned
no-drop condition occurs after the slow-down checklist is completed, aircraft commanders will
determine if enough training was accomplished for navigators (when dropping a training bundle)
and pilots to credit the event.
AD06 Visual Airdrop
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready crewmembers.
Description: VMC airdrop using visual procedures. See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-
130v3 for visual airdrop procedures. Actual airdrop may be simulated as long as all checklists
are completed.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
AD07 SKE Airdrop
Purpose: Continuation training for SKE airdrop qualified mission-ready crewmembers.
AWADS airdrop certified crewmembers log AD08. Actual airdrop may be simulated as long as
all checklists are completed.
Description: SKE formation airdrop. See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3 for SKE
formation airdrop procedures.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: AWADS airdrop certified crewmembers are not required to fly or track
AD07, SKE Airdrop. If AWADS crews fly a SKE-only airplane or equipment problems require
a SKE airdrop, AWADS units may elect to credit AD07 to accurately reflect training
accomplished. Do not credit AD07 and AD08 on the same airdrop.
AD08 AWADS Airdrop
Purpose: Continuation training for AWADS airdrop certified mission-ready crewmembers.
Description: AWADS airdrop. See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3 for AWADS
airdrop procedures. Actual airdrop may be simulated as long as all checklists are completed.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: AWADS airdrop certified crewmembers are not required to fly or track
AD07, SKE Airdrop. If AWADS crews fly a SKE-only airplane or equipment problems require
a SKE airdrop, AWADS units may elect to credit AD07 to accurately reflect training
accomplished. Do not credit AD07 and AD08 on the same airdrop.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 81
AD09 Medium/High Altitude Airdrop
Purpose: Continuation training for mission-ready crewmembers.
Description: Airdrop at medium or high altitude. See paragraph 7.4.1 and Attachment 1 for
airdrop altitude definitions. Crewmembers should attempt to practice this event at the highest
practical altitude commensurate with DZ size and airspace restrictions. See AFTTP 3-3.C-130,
AFI 11-2C-130v3, AFI 11-231, and AFI 13-217 for medium/high-altitude airdrop procedures
and restrictions. See also paragraph 5.13.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: Crewmembers will perform their airdrop duties while on oxygen in
order to credit the event, regardless of airdrop altitude flown. Accomplish in formation to the
max extent possible. If DZ size does not permit dropping at or above the minimum for medium
altitude, actual airdrop may be simulated at medium / high altitude as long as all checklists are
completed. If local airspace or other restrictions preclude flying the airdrop at medium / high
altitudes, units may credit this event in the simulator, or accomplish the event at low altitude if
no other alternative is available. However, the intent is to fly an actual airdrop in the aircraft at
or above 10,000' MSL on oxygen whenever practical.
AD10 I-CDS/JPADS Airdrop
Purpose: Continuation training for I-CDS/JPADS certified navigators and loadmasters.
Description: JPADS airdrop to include mission planning, flight station and cargo compartment
configuration, JPADS checklists, and I-CDS or JPADS airdrop to an appropriate DZ. Crews will
comply with all requirements of AFI 13-217. Loadmasters who are only I-CDS certified (Q521)
will load, rig, and drop an actual I-CDS bundle. Loadmasters who are JPADS certified (Q522)
will load and rig an actual JPADS guided bundle. JPADS certified loadmasters (Q522) will
drop either an actual JPADS guided bundle (if desired/permitted), or will simulate a guided
bundle drop by performing an in-flight wireless update to the AGU and then dropping an actual
I-CDS bundle instead. There is no minimum altitude for this event, other than the minimum
altitude to drop a sonde or a guided system, though realistic AFTTP 3-3.C-130 altitudes should
be used to the maximum extent possible based on airspace and DZ restrictions.
For I-CDS drops, in the event that the dropsonde(s) was (were) deployed but insufficient
dropsonde data was gathered to update the release point with the PADS computer, the crew will
make all reasonable attempts to troubleshoot the problem, to include completion of the I-
CDS/JPADS troubleshooting guide. If these procedures fail to correct the problem, then at the
discretion of the aircraft commander, the event can still be considered complete if the crew
successfully airdrops the bundle by completing the I-CDS/JPADS to Conventional Quick
Transition Checklist, and performing a racetrack/re-attack using conventional ballistic CDS
procedures.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Navigators: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST/SNS; Loadmasters: Aircraft.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
82 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Additional Information: Navigators must perform primary navigator duties to credit this event.
If dropping an actual JPADS guided bundle is not practical, loadmasters still require an AGU
rigged on a bundle aboard the aircraft to simulate all necessary checklist steps, and in-flight
wireless update. Loadmasters may credit the event if all checklists through the slowdown
checklist are accomplished, and there is not a no-drop condition due to either loadmaster. If a
planned or unplanned no-drop condition occurs after the slow-down checklist is completed,
aircraft commanders will determine if enough training was accomplished to credit the event.
May dual log with AD04 and AD09 if all requirements are met. Navigators who are also
performing PADS Operator duties in addition to primary navigator duties may also dual log with
AD11 and AD12 if all of the requirements are met.
AD11 PADS Operator Unguided Airdrop
Purpose: Continuation training for PADS operator certified mission-ready navigators or pilots.
Description: I-CDS (JPADS unguided) airdrop to include mission planning, JPADS computer
preflight and in-flight actions, flight station and cargo compartment configuration, JPADS
checklists, sonde drop/monitoring, collateral damage estimate, and I-CDS airdrop to an
appropriate DZ. Crews will comply with all requirements of AFI 13-217. The unguided system
airdrop is considered complete with successful deployment of the dropsonde(s), update of the
release point via PADS computer and airdrop of the bundle. There is no minimum altitude for
this event when accomplished in the aircraft, other than the minimum altitude to drop a sonde,
though realistic AFTTP 3-3.C-130 altitudes should be used to the maximum extent possible
based on airspace and DZ restrictions.
For I-CDS drops, in the event that the dropsonde(s) was (were) deployed but insufficient
dropsonde data was gathered to update the release point with the PADS computer, the crew will
make all reasonable attempts to troubleshoot the problem, to include completion of the I-
CDS/JPADS troubleshooting guide. If these procedures fail to correct the problem, then at the
discretion of the aircraft commander, the event can still be considered complete if the crew
successfully airdrops the bundle by completing the I-CDS/JPADS to Conventional Quick
Transition Checklist, and performing a racetrack/re-attack using conventional ballistic CDS
procedures.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST/SNS
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: PADS Operators must perform all PADS duties to credit the event.
Pilot PADS operators may not log this event while occupying either pilot's seat. This event may
be accomplished in conjunction with a simulated guided drop (e.g., after sonde drop, racetrack
and update both the guided solution and the unguided/I-CDS solution, perform wireless transfer
to the AGU, then turn inbound for an actual I-CDS drop). May dual log with AD04, AD09,
AD10, and AD12 (in any combination) if all requirements of each of the respective events are
met.
AD12 PADS Operator Guided Airdrop
Purpose: Continuation training for PADS operator certified mission-ready crewmembers
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 83
Description: JPADS airdrop to include mission planning, JPADS computer preflight and in-
flight actions, flight station and cargo compartment configuration, JPADS checklists, collateral
damage assessment, and guided system wireless transfer. Crews will comply with all
requirements of AFI 13-217. The guided system airdrop is considered complete with update of
the release point and launch acceptability region (LAR) using the JPADS computer (with or
without sonde data), wireless transfer to the AGU, and completion of all checklists through the
slowdown checklist. Minimum altitudes for actual guided airdrops are IAW specific
requirements of each guided system and AFI 13-217. There is no minimum altitude for
simulated drops used in training, but realistic AFTTP 3-3.C-130 altitudes should be used to the
maximum extent possible based on airspace and DZ restrictions.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: PADS Operators must perform all PADS duties to credit the event.
Pilot PADS operators may not log this event while occupying either pilot's seat. Normally, the
guided airdrop will be simulated by an I-CDS bundle, but actual airdrop of either the guided
system or unguided I-CDS is not required. However, the intent is to include to the max extent
possible at least a dry pass/simulated drop that includes completion of all appropriate checklists.
This event may be accomplished in conjunction with an I-CDS drop (e.g., after sonde drop,
racetrack and update both the guided solution and the unguided/I-CDS solution, perform wireless
transfer, then turn inbound for an actual I-CDS drop). May dual log with AD04, AD09, AD10
and AD11 if all requirements of the events are met. If local airspace restrictions preclude flying
this event in the aircraft, the event may be credited in the WST; however, the intent is for PADS
Operators to fly at least one actual I-CDS/JPADS event in the aircraft per year.
7.5. Airland (AS) Events. Pilots, MPD pilots and copilots accomplish assault training in their
respective aircrew positions. MPD pilots and copilots receive credit for assault events for
performing their normal pilot not flying duties during these events; but they do not actually
perform the maneuvers. Aircraft commanders or higher will not credit assault airland events
unless they actually fly the maneuver.
AS09 Assault Takeoff
Purpose: Training designed to give pilots experience in the procedures for taking off from a
short or unimproved airfield.
Description: Accomplish an assault takeoff. Does not have to be accomplished on a short or
unimproved airfield.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: See the C-130 technical orders (Dash 1) for detailed procedures and
AFI 11-2C-130v3 for training restrictions. See AFTTP 3-3.C-130. Aircraft commanders and
above need to perform pilot flying duties to credit this event. May be dual logged with P020 by
the pilot flying the aircraft.
84 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
AS11 Assault Landing
Purpose: Training designed to give pilots experience landing the aircraft at short and
unimproved airfields.
Description: Accomplish assault landings IAW AFTTP 3-3.C-130 on appropriately marked
landing zones of 3000 ft or more (zone may be marked on larger runways). Meet the following
requirements in order to log the landings: (1) Touchdown within the first 500-feet. (2) Do not
credit go-arounds.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: See the C-130 technical orders (Dash 1) for detailed procedures and
AFI 11-2C-130v3 for training restrictions. See AFTTP 3-3.C-130. Aircraft commanders and
above need to perform pilot flying duties to credit this event. Will be dual logged with P190 by
the pilot flying the aircraft. May be dual logged with P192 (by the pilot flying) if accomplished
at night.
AS12 Unaided Night Assault Landing
Purpose: Pilot training for landing on assault zones at night.
Description: Accomplish an un-aided assault landing in the period between the end of evening
civil twilight and the beginning of morning civil twilight, as published in the Air Almanac.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: Aircraft commanders and above need to perform pilot flying duties to
credit this event. Will be dual logged with P190 and P192 by the pilot flying the aircraft. Both
pilots (pilot flying and MPD pilot or copilot) may dual log with AS11.
AS21 Heavyweight Assault Landing
Purpose: Continuation training for aircraft commanders.
Description: Accomplish an assault landing at an aircraft gross weight of 115,000 pounds or
greater.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: Aircraft commanders and above need to perform pilot flying duties to
credit this event. Both pilots (pilot flying and MPD pilot or copilot) may credit AS11 and AS12
(if accomplished at night). The pilot flying the aircraft may also dual log with the appropriate
normal landings.
AS31 Unimproved Airfield Assault Landing
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 85
Purpose: Training designed to support the Unimproved Landing Certification (paragraph 5.10).
Description: One-time training required for assault landing on an unimproved airfield
certification. To qualify, all aircraft commanders qualified for assault landings will accomplish
their first unimproved airfield landing to the satisfaction of an instructor pilot. Once qualified,
there are no recurring training requirements associated with this event.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Curriculum Development: Unit / IP
Training Media: Aircraft
Instructor: Direct supervision by an Unimproved Landing certified IP is required.
Additional Information: Check the ASRR and AZAR to verify the suitability of any unimproved
runway. See AFI 13-217. Aircraft commanders and above need to perform pilot flying duties to
credit this event. Will be dual logged with appropriate ―AS‖ events by both pilots (pilot flying
and MPD pilot or copilot). Additionally, the pilot flying the aircraft may dual log with
appropriate normal landing events.
7.6. Navigation and Individual Proficiency Training (B, GD, N) Events. B014 Category 1
Sortie
Purpose: Navigation training for selected crewmembers to practice en route flight procedures
when land-based navigation aids are not available and the aircrew needs to safely navigate to
their destination.
Description: The basic navigation sortie will consist of a minimum of two hours of category 1
procedures to allow the navigator to demonstrate all procedures and mission tasks normally
encountered on a category 1 mission. These tasks will include, but not be limited to, mission
planning, pre-flight fuel planning, equal time point (ETP) computation, chart preparation,
deviation checks, coast-out/in procedures, aircraft position fixing using appropriate/available
navigation aids (normally, a minimum of one radar and one navigation aid fix), log work, dead
reckoning, use of navigation systems/computers, pacing, in-flight fuel management, and other
appropriate procedures. The Self-Contained Navigation System (SCNS) and the Global
Positioning System (GPS) positions will be recorded, plotted, and evaluated for all fixes. A full-
line log entry will be accomplished at least once during B014. A fix will be accomplished at
least once every hour on all Category 1 routes. B014 may be accomplished day or night and
over land or water.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft, WST, or SNS.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: Celestial and pressure navigation are not required during B014.
Celestial heading checks are not required; deviation checks will be accomplished via the INU
true heading. (Units may require celestial or pressure navigation procedures if they desire.
However, the C-130 ATS does not teach students these procedures and such training will be
incorporated into Unit Indoctrination training. Additionally, such units should use a unit-specific
ARMS identifier to track pressure or celestial continuation training requirements.) MAJCOMs
may levy additional requirements on the B014 training event.
86 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
GD09 Grid Navigation Sortie
Purpose: Use of an alternative system of navigation.
Description: Grid profile (day or night). This event uses a grid reference system for aircraft
steering and should continue for at least a 2-hour period. Instructor navigators may credit a grid
event on a category I or II route. Grid profiles may also be logged as a navigational profile if
requirements are met. Events may be logged when flown in a WST, SNS, or CTD.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft, WST, SNS, or CTD.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
N120 Airborne Radar Approach (ARA)
Purpose: Practice for navigators in guiding the aircraft to a safe landing using aircraft radar.
Description: Make practice approaches under VMC (day or night) or under ground radar
monitoring during IMC (per the instrument procedures in AFI 11-C-130v3). Do not log ARAs
when the pilot is making any other type instrument approach. Credit the ARA if, in the opinion
of the pilot, a safe landing can be made from minimums. See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-
2C-130v3.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft, WST, or SNS.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
7.7. Miscellaneous (C, E, FE) Events. C040 Mobility Folder Review
Purpose: Units will track personnel preparedness using the Deployment Management System
(DeMS) or AF Form 4005, Individual Deployment Requirements. Other systems are not
authorized to track personnel readiness.
Description: The unit commander ensures unit personnel prepare for deployment in accordance
with this AFI, AFMAN 10-401, and AFI 36-507.
OPR: Unit Commander and Unit Deployment Manager.
Additional Information: See AFI 10-403, Deployment Planning and Execution. Frequency of this
event will be determined by the unit.
E030 Passport
Purpose: Track passport expiration dates for crewmembers.
Description: All crewmembers should have a current Official US passport in order to comply
with country entry requirements specified in the Foreign Clearance Guide.
E035 Secondary Passport
Purpose: Track secondary passport expiration dates for crewmembers.
Description: As required for unit mission. Primary use is for visa application.
E112 Information Protection.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 87
Purpose: Ensure all personnel using Air Force information systems understand the necessity and
practice of safeguarding information processed, stored, or transmitted on all these systems. See
course description in ETCA, Ancillary Training
E113 Human Relations.
Purpose: See course description in ETCA, Ancillary Training. This training replaces Combat
Trafficking and Suicide Awareness and Violence Prevention (SVAT).
E114 Force Protection
Purpose: Provides detailed guidance for reporting and preventing terrorist activity.
Description: See course description in ETCA, Ancillary Training. Course covers information on
threat conditions, security reporting, safe guarding aircraft and COMSEC equipment, and
individual responsibilities and protective measures. (AFI 10-245, Air Force Antiterrorism (AT)
Standards).
OPR: AF/A1DLT
Curriculum Development: Units
Training Media: Lecture and handouts.
Instructor: Local AFOSI, AFAT Level II trained instructors, or CBT (IAW AFI 10-245).
Additional Information: Normally conducted during G070, Aircrew Intelligence. Unit personnel
should contact unit intelligence personnel for up-to-date information on threat conditions in
countries they will or may be likely to travel through.
FE09 Optical Threat Event
Purpose: Continuation training for mission-ready crewmembers to recognize and defeat optical
guided threats.
Description: Proper application of tactics, techniques and procedures to recognize and defeat an
optical guided threat (e.g. Anti-Aircraft Artillery (AAA), small arms). See AFTTP 3-1.Threat
Guide, AFTTP 3-1.C-130, AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3 for tactics, techniques
and procedures.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Curriculum Development: Unit (Aircraft commander if single ship or Formation Mission
Commander).
Training Media: Aircraft, WST or Visual Threat Recognition and Avoidance Trainer (VTRAT).
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: May be verbally debriefed by any instructor pilot or instructor navigator.
FE19 IR Threat Event
Purpose: Continuation training for mission-ready crewmembers to recognize and defeat Infra-
Red (IR) guided threats.
Description: Proper application of tactics, techniques and procedures to recognize and defeat an
IR guided threat (e.g. MANPADS, SA-9/13). Includes proper employment of aircraft counter
88 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
measures systems (actual or simulated release of expendables) if equipped. See AFTTP 3-
1.Threat Guide, AFTTP 3-1.C-130, AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3 for tactics,
techniques and procedures.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Curriculum Development: Unit (Formation Mission Commander).
Training Media: Aircraft, WST or VTRAT.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: Applies only to units whose aircraft are ADS-equipped, unless otherwise
directed by the Sq/CC or appropriate operations training supervisor. May be verbally debriefed
by any instructor pilot or instructor navigator.
FE29 RWR Event
Purpose: Continuation training for mission-ready crewmembers to recognize and defeat radar-
guided threats. Applies only to units whose aircraft are radar warning receiver (RWR) equipped,
unless otherwise directed by the Sq/CC or appropriate operations training supervisor.
Description: Proper application of tactics, techniques and procedures to recognize and defeat
radar-guided threats. Normally the aircrew will react because of an ADS or RWR indication or
threat call, but this may be simulated by any crewmember.
OPR: AMC/A3D
Curriculum Development: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft, WST or VTRAT.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: The Aircraft Commander (or pilot flying the aircraft) will determine
how far to take the threat reaction based on weather, terrain, aircrew experience, and other
aircraft (to include the formation). May be verbally debriefed by any instructor pilot or instructor
navigator.
7.8. Formation Departure / Recovery (FR) Events. FR06 Formation Visual Departure.
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready pilots.
Description: The segment of a visual route from departure or low-approach to established in
formation at briefed assembly altitude. See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3 for
formation departure procedures.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: Aircraft commanders need to perform pilot flying duties to credit this
event. Both pilots (pilot flying and MPD pilot or copilot) may log this event.
FR16 Formation Visual Recovery.
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready pilots.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 89
Description: See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3 for formation visual recovery
procedures.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: Aircraft commanders need to perform pilot flying duties to credit this
event. Both pilots (pilot flying and MPD pilot or copilot) may log this event.
FR26 SKE Departure
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready pilots.
Description: See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3 for SKE formation procedures.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: Aircraft commanders need to perform pilot flying duties to credit this
event. Both pilots (pilot flying and MPD pilot or copilot) may log this event.
FR36 SKE Recovery
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready pilots.
Description: See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3 for SKE formation procedures.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: Aircraft commanders need to perform pilot flying duties to credit this
event. Both pilots (pilot flying and MPD pilot or copilot) may log this event.
7.9. Ground Training (G) Events.
7.9.1. Records and Documentation. Units should use AF Form 1522, ARMS Additional
Training Accomplishment Input, and AF Form 3526, ARMS OMR Event Accomplishment
Report, to record training accomplishments. Small arms training will be recorded on AF
Form 522, USAF Ground Weapons Training Data. Course instructors will deliver these
forms to the appropriate scheduling and training documentation sections within one duty day
after the class is taught.
G001 Unit Indoctrination Training
Purpose: Each newly assigned aircrew member will complete a local unit indoctrination
program prior to performing unsupervised primary aircrew duties. This is one-time training after
a permanent change of station.
Description: This training is a requirement for all newly assigned and attached aircrew members.
Each unit will publish specific ground and flight requirements. This training will prepare
90 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
crewmembers for the unit’s operational mission and will, as a minimum, consist of ground
training, flying training and a local orientation flight. Crewmembers do not have to be at the
controls to credit event. More than one crewmember may be trained at a time. This training will
familiarize them with the local flying area and available facilities/support agencies, introduce
any unit/mission unique procedures, and ensure all ground and flying training requirements are
met. Document Unit Indoctrination training in ARMS for assigned and attached personnel.
G002 Aircraft Marshalling Training and Examination
Purpose: Ensures crewmembers understand proper marshalling procedures preventing aircraft
taxi incidents.
Description: Review of AFI 11-218, Aircraft Operation and Movement on the Ground, followed
by a test. MAJCOMs will ensure that all ground and all aircrew personnel who are or could be
directly involved with aircraft movement are tested on their knowledge of marshalling signals,
airport markings, lights, and signs. Test personnel within 30 days after:
Reporting for duty following permanent change of station (N/A if tested at a formal school
within the previous 6 months), or
After their first assignment to duties requiring knowledge of marshalling signals and/or airport
markings, lights, and signs.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T
G005 Flight Physical
Purpose: Ensure that aircrew members are physically fit to perform aircrew duties.
Description: AFI 48-123v3, Flying and Special Operational Duty. Currency expires on the last
day of birth month.
OPR: AF/SG3P.
Additional Information: Flight Physical is automatically tracked as an ARMS resource event. If
units elect to track Flight Physical as a training event, use G005 as the identifier.
G006 Physiological Training
Purpose: Familiarize aircrew members with physiological conditions associated with aircrew
duties.
Refer to AFI 11-403 for description and requirements.
OPR: AFMOA/SGOA
Additional Information: Physiological Training is automatically tracked as an ARMS resource
event. If units elect to track Physiological Training as a training event, use G006 as the
identifier.
G007 Flight Records Review.
Purpose: Event to track crewmember’s review of their flight records
Description: Governed by AFI 11-401.
G010 Chemical, Biological, Radiological, Nuclear, or High-Yield Explosive (CBRNE)
Defense Training
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 91
Purpose: Train crewmembers to successfully survive and fight in a Chemical, Biological,
Radiological, Nuclear, or High-Yield Explosive (CBRNE) environment while wearing ground
crew individual protective equipment. See AFI 10-2501, Air Force Emergency Management
(EM) Program Planning and Operations.
Description: Academic and hands-on training with ground crew protective equipment
components. CBRNE Awareness CBT on the ADLS site will be completed within 60 days prior
to attendance of G010. Units may combine this training with LL04 (Aircrew Chemical Defense
Training), provided both aircrew and ground ensembles are fully covered.
OPR: HQ AMC/A7O or MAJCOM/CEX
Curriculum Development: HQ AFCESA/CEX and local civil engineering readiness flight
Training Media: Lecture accompanied by hands-on training with the ground crew protective
equipment.
Instructor: Qualified disaster preparedness personnel (Civil Engineering Readiness Flight).
G055 Emergency Nuclear Airlift Force (ENAF) Training
Purpose: Gives airlift aircrews familiarity in the procedures for handling, protecting, and
moving weapons of mass destruction during contingencies.
Description: One time training, given at the FTU, that provides crewmembers information
concerning the emergency movement of nuclear weapons.
OPR: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Academics for all crewmembers.
Curriculum Development: ATS contractor
Instructor: ATS contractor and FTU.
Additional information: See AFI 11-237, Nuclear Weapons Airlift Training.
G060 Aircrew Tactics Continuation Training
Purpose: To provide the crewmember with information necessary for effective and successful
execution of the unit’s assigned employment mission.
Description: G060 will be administered using courseware developed by HQ AMC/A3D. The
courseware is posted on the AMC Combat Operations SIPRNET website
www.amc.scott.af.smil.mil/hosted_orgs/dok/. The course is based on information found in
AFTTP 3-1, AFTTP 3-3 and AFI 11-2C-130v3 as well as any other documents pertaining to the
execution of the unit’s mission. Additional information may be added to the course by the unit
tactician, weapons officer (if applicable) or by the direction of the OG/CC.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3D.
Course Development: HQ AMC/A3D.
Training Media: Lecture.
Instructor: Rated Instructor Required. Instructor will be a graduate of the USAF Weapons
School, the USAF EC Combat Aircrew Tactics School, or the AATTC Aircrew Course.
92 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Additional Information: Tactics Instructors who teach G060 may credit their G060 semi-annual
requirement. USAFWS instructors and students may credit G060 semiannually upon completion
of formal weapons school course syllabus.
G070 Aircrew Intelligence Training (AIT)
Purpose: Provide crews fundamentals of threat knowledge, visual recognition, and collection
and reporting requirements. Enhance crewmember understanding of threats to unit assets with a
direct impact on mission success and aircrew survival.
Description: Course will provide aircrew with details concerning how, when and what to include
in Mission Reports (MISREP), Ops-Intel interface, Request for Information (RFI), Escape and
Evasion procedures and the development and coordination of Evasion Plans of Action (EPA).
See AFI 14-202v1, AFI 14-105, Unit Intelligence Mission and Responsibilities, and AFI 14-
202v1, Intelligence Training, for further guidance. The unit intelligence officer will administer
an AIT-related test to determine if training objectives are being met.
OPR: AMC/A2T
Course Development: AMC/A2T, with tailoring by unit intelligence personnel.
Instructors: Certified Unit Intelligence Trainer.
Training Media: Lecture.
Additional Information: USAFWS (WIC) instructors, cadre, and students may credit G070 with
completion of formal weapons course syllabus instruction.
G080 Communications Procedures
Purpose: Ensures crewmembers possess a thorough knowledge of all communication and
COMSEC requirements.
Description: This course includes detailed discussion of equipment operation, procedures, and
training requirements applicable to peacetime and wartime communications operations. Includes
the proper use, protection, disposition, and accountability of COMSEC material. Course may be
combined with G060, Tactics. The following subjects should be covered:
Authentication procedures
Identification, Friend, or Foe (IFF)/ Selective Identification Features (SIF) procedures and
equipment operation
AFKAI-1
HAVE QUICK
Flight Information Handbook review
KY-58, Secure Voice radio
Combat Track II
COMSEC user requirements
L-BAND Satellite Communications (SATCOM)
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T/A3A and HQ AMC/A6X
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 93
Curriculum Development: Units
Training Media: Lecture.
Instructor: Qualified instructor, WIC graduate, or ATS instructor (if included in ATS contract)
G090 Anti-Hijacking
Purpose: Provides aircrews with training on US Air Force policy and guidance on preventing
and resisting aircraft piracy (hijacking).
Description: This training will consist of a review of AFI 13-207, Preventing and Resisting
Aircraft Piracy [Hijacking] and a criterion test.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T and AMC/A7S
Curriculum Development: ATS Contractor
Training Media: CBT
Instructor: Unit designated instructor
G100 Law of Armed Conflict (LOAC)
Purpose: Ensure crewmembers understand LOAC.
Description: This training includes the principles and rules of LOAC for aircrews to carry out
their duties and responsibilities according to The Hague and Geneva Conventions. If units
choose, this may be accomplished via CBT.
OPR: USAF/JAO
Curriculum Development: Unit
Training Media: Lecture, but may be CBT. The CBT is located on the Advanced Distributed
Learning Service (ADLS) website at https://golearn.csd.disa.mil.
Instructor: Wing assigned legal officer or unit intelligence officer
Additional Information. May be conducted during G070. Due to the different mission
requirements, units have the option of putting increased emphasis on those areas in the course of
particular interest to them. During wartime or contingency operations, the intelligence officer
may brief LOAC with prior coordination between JA and intelligence. Intelligence is only
responsible for presenting JA's scripted briefing. See AFI 51-401, Training and Reporting to
Ensure Compliance With the Law of Armed Conflict.
G120 ISOPREP Review
Purpose: Generate (if necessary), review, and ensure accuracy of crewmembers’ DD Form 1833,
Isolated Personnel Report.
Description: Review of isolated personnel report (ISOPREP). May be completed during an
aircrew’s G070-Aircrew Intelligence Training (AIT). All crewmembers will maintain a digital
ISOPREP in Personnel Recovery Management System (PRMS), IAW Joint Personnel Recovery
Agency (JRPA) guidance. Once printed, the ISOPREP card is classified CONFIDENTIAL and
must be safeguarded according to AFI 14-105. Frequency in cited references is annual review,
while MAF aircrews standardize at prescribed rate in Table 4.2 and at least every 180 days.
94 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
During employment operations, personnel will review ISOPREP upon deployment, prior to the
first mission of the day and as often as necessary thereafter.
OPR: HQ AMC/A2
Instructor: Unit Intelligence officer
Additional Information. See JP-3-50, Personnel Recovery. Review of the crewmember’s
ISOPREP card within 90 days prior to Air Expeditionary Force (AEF) deployments is
mandatory.
G130 Instrument Refresher Course (IRC)
Purpose: To ensure pilots and navigators possess sufficient knowledge of all applicable
directives, procedures, and techniques to assure safe and professional instrument flying.
Description: Guidance for development of unit IRC programs, including topics and subject
outlines, course length, instructor prerequisites, and methods of instruction is contained in
AFMAN 11-210. Familiarity with AFMAN 11-210 is essential for unit program developers and
IRC instructors. Log IRC upon completion of the IRC course. However, the Instrument Exam
will be completed within the flight evaluation eligibility period. See the Air Force Flight
Standards Agency (AFFSA) website for current list of topics that will be addressed:
https://afkm.wpafb.af.mil/ASPs/CoP/OpenCoP.asp?Filter=OO-ED-AF-96.
OPR: HQ AFFSA and HQ AMC/A3T
Curriculum Development: Air Force Flight Standards Agency (AFFSA) and unit
Training Media: IAW AFMAN 11-210.
Instructor: IRC-qualified instructor
G150 Approach Plate Familiarization Course
Purpose: Provide flight engineers with the knowledge and skills necessary to monitor the briefed
departure and approach and advise the pilots of any deviations that would compromise safety.
Description: Course includes a breakdown of standard DOD approach plates, explanation of
aircraft navigation equipment, departure and terminal arrival procedures, instrument approach
types, the initial approach portion to the final approach portion, and final approach procedures.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T
Curriculum Development: ATS contractor, squadron
Training Media: Academic instruction.
Instructor: ATS FE Instructor or unit-designated instructor.
Additional Information: Unit commanders may substitute G130 for this course. Units that elect
to teach it normally use a graduate of the Air Force Instrument School to teach this course.
However, units may consider using an Instructor flight engineer who has received this training to
train other flight engineers. NOTES: Attendance at the IRC (test not required) satisfies this
requirement.
G182/G182A Hazardous Cargo
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 95
Purpose: To familiarize Aircraft Commanders and Loadmasters with procedures and restrictions
when carrying hazardous materials.
Description: Complete ATS/squadron provided instruction reviewing AFJI 11-204, Operational
Procedures for Aircraft Carrying Hazardous Materials. Use AFJI 11-204 in conjunction with
AFMAN 24-204, Preparing Hazardous Materials for Military Air Shipments. The syllabus
includes:
Hazardous classification
Aircraft loading and passenger movement
Certification/Packaging
Tactical and contingency airlift
Marking and labeling
Aircrew responsibility
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T
Curricular Development: ATS contractor or squadron instructor
Training Media: Academic instruction (either a class or one-on-one).
Instructor: Qualified Instructor Loadmaster.
Additional Information: AMCH 11-214, Aircrew Hazardous Materials Handbook and AFMAN
24-204. Aircraft commanders are not required to take a written test.
G220 Flight Engineer Systems Refresher
Purpose: Continuation training is designed to improve the engineer's technical knowledge of
aircraft systems, operational procedures, and unit mission.
Description: Engineers will complete an annual ground-training course covering selected aircraft
systems in ATS contractor courseware. In addition, review hostile environment repair procedures
in AFI 11-2C-130v3.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T
Curriculum Development: ATS Contractor
Training Media: Academic instruction and simulator
Instructor: ATS Contractor or Instructor flight engineer
Additional Information: Completion of this training satisfies the requirement for Hostile
Environment Repair training.
G230 Crew Resource Management (CRM) Refresher Academics
Purpose: Mission-specific continuation CRM training conducted according to AFI 11-290,
Cockpit/Crew Resource Management Training Program, and MAJCOM Supplements.
Description: Reinforces initial CRM training through an academic review of the MAJCOM
common core subjects (according AFI 11-290 and MAJCOM supplements) with specific
emphasis on an annual refresher topic.
96 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T
Curriculum Development: ATS contractor
Training Media: Lecture.
Instructor: ATS or CRM Instructor qualified crewmember.
Additional Information. See AFI 11-290 and MAJCOM supplements.
G231 Initial Crew Resource Management (CRM) Training
Purpose: Aircraft and crew-specific CRM training conducted according to AFI 11-290 and
MAJCOM Supplements.
Description: Introduces common core subjects (according to AFI 11-290 and MAJCOM
Supplements). If initial CRM is not accomplished at the formal school, it shall be accomplished
within 1 year of reporting to home station.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T
Curriculum Development: ATS contractor
Training Media: WST and lectures.
Instructor: ATS contractor
Additional Information: Completion of any CRM pre-work, if applicable, is required prior to
attending CRM training. Pre-work will be distributed to organizations in sufficient time and
supply to allow completion.
G233 C130 Crew Resource Management Facilitator Course
Purpose: Qualifies students to teach principles of CRM to their unit and provide them the skills
and materials necessary to facilitate in-unit CRM training. Includes CRM seminar, instructor
enhancement, and practice instruction and seminar presentation.
Description: A course of instruction taught at Little Rock AFB designed for unit Instructors,
Examiners, and Supervisors to become CRM instructors. See ETCA and AFI 11-290.
OPR: AMC/A3T
Curriculum Development: ATS Contractor.
Training Media: Lecture and WST.
Instructor: ATS Contractor.
G240 Crew Resource Management (CRM) Simulator
Purpose: To provide practical application of classroom-presented CRM refresher concepts
through CRM simulator training addressing human factors issues in a realistic mission scenario.
NOTE: A separate CRM simulator profile is not required if during G250 or G600, CRM is
briefed, utilized, and debriefed for each simulator mission.
Description: CRM mission-oriented simulator training (MOST) is conducted according to AFI
11-290 and MAJCOM Supplements. This training should focus upon realistic and demanding
unit mission scenarios to include combat, contingency, and peacetime missions.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 97
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T
Curriculum Development: ATS Contractor.
Training Media: WST
Instructor: ATS contractor
Additional Information. The recommended minimum crew size for this course is an aircraft
commander, copilot or MPD pilot, navigator and flight engineer. If MAJCOMs authorize less
than the recommended crew complement to attend refresher training, the affected units will
ensure that the ATS contractor is able to support the missing crewmembers. G240 should be
accomplished in conjunction with G230, CRM Refresher academics.
G250 Pilot Simulator Refresher (PSR) and Flight Engineer Simulator Refresher (FSR)
Courses
Purpose: Pilots and engineers will complete annual simulator refresher.
Description: Satisfactory completion of the C-130 ATS qualification or requalification course
will satisfy the simulator refresher course requirement for the annual training cycle. Incorporates
the requirements of G240, CRM Simulator.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T
Curriculum Development: ATS Contractor
Training Media: WST
Instructor: ATS contractor
Additional Information. This is an ATS course as defined by Chapter 6. Units or crewmembers
who desire to practice specific events will identify those requirements on the first day of training.
The recommended minimum crew size for this course is an aircraft commander, copilot/MPD
pilot, and flight engineer. If MAJCOMs authorize less than the recommended crew complement
to attend refresher training, the affected units will ensure that the ATS contractor is able to
support the missing crewmembers or else the ATS contractor is not required to provide the
training.
G280 Small Arms Training
Purpose: To train crewmembers in successful engagement of enemy targets within the range and
capabilities of their assigned weapon.
Description: Course will meet the requirements of AFI 36-2226, Combat Arms Training and
Maintenance (CATM) Program. Units will use AFI 31-207, Arming and Use of Force by Air
Force Personnel, Attachment 7 to instruct ―Use of Force‖ training.
OPR: HQ AMC/A7F.
Curriculum Development: Wing Combined Arms Training Maintenance (CATM).
Instructor: Qualified SFS combat arms instructor.
G281 Self-Aid and Buddy Care Training (SABC)
Purpose: Provide basic life and limb-saving techniques to help wounded or injured personnel
survive in medical emergencies until medical help is available.
98 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Description: SABC is an educational program established for nonmedical personnel. It
concentrates on emergency first-aid procedures. It applies to all personnel of the regular Air
Force, the Air National Guard, and Air Force Reserve Command. Unit commanders will ensure
that personnel requiring SABC receive training and keep their certification current. See AFI 36-
2238, Self-Aid and Buddy Care Training.
OPR: HQ USAF/SGWN.
Curriculum Development: HQ AETC/SGN.
Additional Information: Training remains current for 24 months. Members who have completed
initial combat survival training are exempt for 24 months.
G310 Weather Avoidance Radar
Purpose: Teach pilots and flight engineers how to use the APN-59, APQ-175, or the APN-241
without a navigator.
Description: Depending on unit aircraft mission and equipment, the pilots and flight engineer
may be required to use the available radar to avoid thunderstorms or other severe weather. This
course is designed to teach crewmembers how to use the radar, radar interpretation, and minor
trouble shooting.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T
Curriculum Development: ATS Contractor
Training Media: Lecture or CBT
Instructor: ATS Contractor
Additional Information: AFI 11-2C-130v3 provides guidance for aircrews on thunderstorms or
other severe weather avoidance.
G600 Navigator Refresher Training (NRT)
Purpose: Periodic training for navigators.
Description: Navigators will complete the annual refresher course as provided by the ATS
contractor. Accomplish the flight portion of this course in the operational flight simulator or
satellite navigator station (SNS). Satisfactory completion of C-130 ATS initial and
requalification training course, Navigator Initial Qualification (NIQ, NIQ-IU), will satisfy the
refresher course requirement for the semi-annual training cycle. Incorporates the requirements of
G240, CRM Simulator, if a portion is flown in a WST.
OPR: AMC/A3T
Curriculum Development: ATS contractor
Training Media: Lecture, WST, and SNS
Instructor: ATS contractor
Additional Information: This is an ATS course as defined by Chapter 6.
G602 Loadmaster Refresher Training
Purpose: Continuation training for Loadmasters.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 99
Description: All loadmasters will annually attend Loadmaster Refresher Training (attend airland
and airdrop course segments applicable to the crewmember's qualification). Complete refresher
training according to ATS courseware. Loadmaster initial qualification and loadmaster mission
qualification satisfy refresher training requirements for the annual training cycle for airland and
airdrop qualifications, respectively.
OPR: AMC/A3T
Curriculum Development: ATS Contractor and unit
Training Media: Lecture and Fuselage Trainer or Aircraft
Instructor: Qualified Instructor Loadmasters and ATS instructors (at FTU).
7.10. Aircrew Flight Equipment Training (LL) Events. MAJCOMs may combine and/or
supplement courses to tailor training to meet their needs. Refer to AFI 11-301v1, Aircrew Flight
Equipment (AFE) Program, and AFI 16-1301, Survival, Evasion, Resistance, and Escape
(SERE) Program, for general instructions and course descriptions.
LL01 Aircrew Flight Equipment Familiarization Training
Purpose: To ensure all crewmembers are familiar with C-130 flight equipment and are able to
identify, locate and utilize appropriate emergency equipment.
Description: One time event, per base assignment, conducted prior to the first flight at home
station to familiarize aircrew members with local AFE items availability, issue, use, pre-flight,
and post-flight procedures. This training will be provided for subsequent re-assignments to the
same base.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3TL
LL03 Egress Training, Non-ejection
Purpose: Understand C-130 Egress procedures.
Description: Evaluates aircrew and passenger ability to demonstrate proficiency in air and
ground emergency egress procedures. Stress the importance of aircrew coordination, aircrew and
passenger responsibilities and use of appropriate emergency egress equipment. Ensure all
crewmembers understand the operation of fire extinguishers located in the aircraft and fire
bottles positioned outside the aircraft. Ensure aircrews are aware of their responsibilities for
conducting safety and passenger briefings IAW AFI 11-202v3. LL03 may be taught by any
aircrew instructor.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3TL.
LL04 Aircrew Chemical Defense Training (ACDT)
Purpose: Understand Aircrew Chemical Defense procedures.
Description: An academic and equipment training session in which the aircrew member
demonstrates and performs donning, doffing, and buddy dressing procedures using either the first
or second generation ACDE or aircrew eye/respiratory protection (AERP) equipment. This
training also includes information on hazards and limitations of wearing the equipment properly
and improperly, preflight procedures, aircraft integration, and parachute descent emergency
procedures. Each aircrew will demonstrate procedures during their initial class; subsequent
100 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
classes require a minimum of 10% of aircrew participants to dress out and demonstrate aircrew
contamination control area (ACCA) processing procedures. Crewmembers who accomplish
initial ACDT at a Technical Training Unit (TTU), Replacement Training Unit (RTU), or Formal
Training Unit (FTU) will receive credit for initial training on arrival at their permanent duty
station. See AFI 11-301v1 and the MAJCOM supplement.
LL05 Egress Training with ACDE
Purpose: Understand Egress Training with ACDE.
Description: Evaluates the aircrew’s ability to demonstrate proficiency in the use of primary as
well as secondary air and ground egress procedures while wearing ACDE. Training will stress
the unique changes in procedures to include added difficulties aircrew would and could
experience as a result of wearing ACDE. See AFI 11-301v1, the MAJCOM supplement, and
AFPD 11-3, Life Support.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3TL
LL06 Aircrew Flight Equipment (AFE)
Purpose: Academic and equipment training in which crewmembers demonstrate their ability to
locate, preflight, and use all aircrew and passenger AFE carried aboard unit aircraft or issued to
crewmembers. Ensure crewmembers are briefed on the limitations and safety issues related to
AFE.
Description: Aircrew Flight Equipment Training (AFET) includes academic and hands-on
training in the location, preflight, and use of all aircrew flight equipment aboard unit aircraft or
issued to unit crewmembers. AFET is conducted as part of initial qualification training for
students. Units should combine LL06 with SS02, LL03, SS05, and track completion of the
following AFE subcategories to ensure proper aircrew currency:
LL06C Combat Survival AFE; normally accomplished with the same frequency and logged in
conjunction with SS02.
LL06E Egress/Oxygen AFE; normally accomplished with the same frequency and logged in
conjunction with LL03.
LL06W Water Survival AFE; normally accomplished with the same frequency and logged in
conjunction with SS05.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3TL
Additional Information: See AFI 11-301v1 and the MAJCOM supplement, and AFPD 11-3.
7.11. Mission-Specific (M) Training Events. M010 Proficiency Sortie
Purpose: Proficiency Sorties ensure crewmembers are familiar with operation of C-130 aircraft.
Description: For navigators, flight engineers and loadmasters: Log proficiency sorties on local
or operational missions that should include appropriate pre-mission planning, preflight according
to flight publications, preparation of performance, take-off and landing data, weather and crew or
passenger briefings, flight plan filing, post-mission procedures, and at least one takeoff and
landing. Two crewmembers (occupying the same crew position) may log a sortie at the same
time if the requirements of a proficiency sortie are met.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 101
For pilots: Proficiency sorties allow pilots to practice instrument, transition, and emergency
procedures while under the supervision of an IP. The following are the minimum required
maneuvers to credit a proficiency sortie (comply with restrictions in AFI 11-2C-130v3):
Aircraft commanders and MPD pilots: review of boldface emergency procedures, one precision
approach, one non-precision approach, one no-flap approach and landing, one holding pattern or
procedure turn, one circling approach (traffic permitting), one simulated engine-out go-around,
one simulated engine-out landing, and one visual flight rules (VFR) traffic pattern (weather
permitting).
Copilots with more than 500 C-130 hours: review of boldface emergency procedures, one
precision approach, one non-precision approach, one holding pattern or procedure turn, one
circling approach (traffic permitting), one simulated engine-out go-around (optional), one no-flap
approach and landing (optional), one simulated engine-out landing (optional), one VFR traffic
pattern (weather permitting), and one landing.
Copilots with 500 C-130 hours or less: review of boldface emergency procedures, one precision
approach, one non-precision approach, one holding pattern or procedure turn, one circling
approach (traffic permitting), one VFR traffic pattern (weather permitting), and one landing.
OPR: AMC/A3T.
Training Media: Aircraft or Level-C or better WST (See Table 4.4 and Table 4.5 for simulator
restrictions).
Instructor: IP required for pilots.
Additional Information (Pilots): Complete all maneuvers to an acceptable level of proficiency as
determined by the IP to log the proficiency sortie. Should weather, maintenance or operational
restrictions preclude completing the planned profile, the instructor will determine whether the
entire proficiency sortie will be re-accomplished or just those events not completed. Pilots need
not accomplish all the events on a single sortie. Credit the proficiency sortie after completing the
last event. Do not credit a proficiency sortie as the result of an evaluation. EXCEPTION: ARC
units will develop proficiency sortie guidelines to remain within their programmed flying hours.
M050 Tactical Mission
Purpose: Continuation training for flight engineers and loadmasters.
Description: Flight engineers and loadmasters will log a tactical mission when they participate
in a low-level, high-level, or composite tactical mission profile that uses the combat entry / exit
checklists, or any of the airdrop checklists. The aircraft commander will determine when enough
individual events are accomplished to credit this event.
OPR: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST (for flight engineers).
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
M060 Theater Indoctrination (TI) Training
Purpose: Provide crewmembers the necessary training to safely operate in a specified theater.
102 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Description: Units will ensure aircrews are trained for specific theater flight operations. As a
minimum, this training will include a thorough review of the climatology, current political and
military situation, local area procedures (e.g., aviation unit prep message, reporting instructions,
ROE/SPINS, airspace), unique instrument requirements and procedures (e.g., non-DoD
instrument approach procedures and required instrumentation for specific approaches), and host
nation agreements.
For PACAF and USAFE crewmembers, this training includes theater orientation and unit
indoctrination. It can be used by PACAF and USAFE to prepare newly assigned crewmembers
for the unit's operational mission. Each newly assigned crewmember will complete a theater
indoctrination program prior to attaining MR status.
Units will ensure crewmembers receive this training at home station or in theater. Units do not
have to repeat any training normally provided in theater.
OPR: MAJCOM/A3T
Additional Information: This training may be dual logged with other events if the requirements
for both M060 and the individual events are accomplished. To credit M060, the training will be
accomplished no earlier than 60 days prior to deployment. Waiver authority is OG/CC
M130 C-130E Sortie
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready crewmembers certified in the C-130E.
Description: Accomplish a C-130E sortie. This event is optional if maintaining a single
certification.
OPR: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or C-130E WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
M131 C-130H/H1 Sortie
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready crewmembers certified in C-130H/H1.
Description: Accomplish a C-130H/H1 sortie. This event is optional if maintaining a single
certification.
OPR: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or C-130H1 WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
M132 C-130H2 Sortie
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready crewmembers certified in the C-130H2.
Description: Accomplish a C-130H2 sortie. This event is optional if maintaining a single
certification.
OPR: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or C-130H2 WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 103
M133 C-130H3 Sortie
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready crewmembers certified in the C-130H3.
Description: Accomplish a C-130H3 sortie. This event is optional if maintaining a single
certification.
OPR: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or C-130H3 WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
M134 WC-130H Sortie
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready crewmembers certified in the WC-130H.
Description: Accomplish a WC-130H sortie. This event is optional if maintaining a single
certification.
OPR: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or C-130E WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
7.12. NVG (NV) Events. NV00 Visual Low Level (VLL) NVG Event
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready crewmembers operating in the low altitude
environment using single-ship or formation procedures and Night Vision Goggles.
Description: Log a NVG VLL event when a minimum of a 20-minute visual route from
acceleration to a time over target (TOT), time of arrival (TOA) or rendezvous is accomplished
when flying single ship or in formation on NVGs.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional information: See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3. Both pilots may
credit this event.
NV01 NVG Initial Ground Training
Purpose: Teaches crewmembers how to use NVGs and their limitations.
Description: Course of instruction will emphasize sound night operations using NVGs, address
common NVG hazards, C-130 specific NVG capabilities and limitations, and the limitations
involved in night low-level NVG-aided operations. Course may include any local hazards or
limiting factors for NVG operations.
OPR: AMC/A3T
Curriculum Development: Armstrong Laboratory, AETC, or local unit.
Training Media: Academic instruction to include hands-on training using a set of NVGs and an
NVG tester.
104 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Instructor: Any Armstrong Laboratory certified NVG instructor.
Additional Information: Directed by AFI 11-202v1.
NV02 NVG Event
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready crewmembers using Night Vision Goggles.
Description: Log a NVG Event when NVG mission items are accomplished and the aircrew
uses the Combat Entry and Combat Exit Checklists in conjunction with a NVG VLL to a
simulated or actual NVG airdrop or Airland event. For loadmasters, NVG airdrop of heavy
equipment or CDS, NVG engine running on/off-load ERO (pallets or rolling stock only) or NVG
Combat Offload satisfies this requirement. The aircraft commander will determine when
enough individual events are accomplished to credit this event.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST (flight engineer)
Instructor: Not required for continuation training. In the event that two loadmasters are NMR
for a NV 02 NVG Event, but MR in all other events to be preformed, only one instructor
loadmaster is required. This does not apply to initial NVG qualification.
Additional information: See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3.
NV03 NVG Ground Refresher Training
Purpose: Provides refresher training on the proper use of NVGs and their limitations.
Description: Course of instruction will emphasize sound night operations using NVGs, address
common NVG hazards, C-130 specific NVG capabilities and limitations, and the limitations
involved in night low-level NVG-aided operations. Course will include any local hazards or
limiting factors for NVG operations.
OPR: AMC/A3T
Curriculum Development: Armstrong Laboratory, AMC/A3T/A3D, and local unit.
Training Media: Academic Instruction.
Instructor: Any Armstrong Laboratory certified NVG instructor, WIC Graduate, USAF NVG
Academic Instructor Course Graduate, or NVG certified instructor pilot or instructor navigator.
Additional Information: Directed by AFI 11-202v1.
NV05 NVG Airland Event
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready crewmembers using Night Vision Goggles.
Description: Log a NVG Airland Event any time a NVG Airland or NVG Assault event is
flown. For Loadmasters, an NVG ERO must be conducted with rolling stock or palletized cargo
only. An actual NVG Combat Offload also satisfies this requirement.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 105
Additional information: See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and AFI 11-2C-130v3 for tactics, techniques,
procedures, and restrictions. May dual log with NV02.
NV08 VLL NVG Formation Event
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready crewmembers operating in the low altitude
environment using visual formation procedures using Night Vision Goggles.
Description: Log a NVG formation event when a minimum of a 20-minute visual route from
assembly to a TOT, TOA or rendezvous is accomplished when flying in visual formation.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and AFI 11-2C-130v3 for tactics, techniques,
procedures, and restrictions. Dual log with NV00. Both pilots may credit this event.
NV18 NVG Airdrop
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready crewmembers certified for NVG airdrops.
Description: An airdrop event or procedure to a covert or overt lit DZ. See AFTTP 3-3.C-130
and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3 for NVG airdrop procedures. Actual airdrop may be simulated as long
as all checklists are completed.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: If requirements are met by crew position, crewmembers may dual log
with AD03, AD04, or AD05. Crewmembers may also dual log with AD06. Both pilots may
credit this event. See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and AFI 11-2C-130v3 for tactics, techniques,
procedures, and restrictions.
NV47 NVG Takeoff
Purpose: A takeoff accomplished with NVGs. This event is a basic proficiency event.
OPR: MAJCOM/A3
Curriculum Development: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: MPD pilots and above need to perform pilot flying duties to credit this
event; additionally, takeoffs may be performed from either left or right seat. MPD pilots are
trained in pilot-flying NVG takeoffs and landings at the FTU. Pilot flying and a traditional
copilot may both credit this event. Dual log with P020 by the pilot flying the aircraft. See
AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and AFI 11-2C-130v3 for tactics, techniques, procedures, and restrictions.
NV48 NVG Landing
106 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Purpose: A landing accomplished with NVGs using standard overt or covert AFI 13-217 lighting
patterns or standard airfield lighting, to include expeditionary airfield lighting systems (EALS).
This event is a basic proficiency event.
Description: A NVG-aided landing.
OPR: MAJCOM/A3
Curriculum Development: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: MPD pilots and above need to perform pilot flying duties to credit this
event; additionally, landings may be performed from either left or right seat. MPD pilots are
trained in pilot-flying NVG takeoffs and landings at the FTU. Pilot flying and a traditional
copilot may both credit this event. Dual log with P190 by the pilot flying the aircraft. See
AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and AFI 11-2C-130v3 for tactics, techniques, procedures, and restrictions.
NV49 NVG Assault Landing
Purpose: An assault landing accomplished with NVGs using standard overt or covert AFI 13-217
lighting patterns, to include expeditionary airfield lighting systems (EALS). MPD pilots and
traditional copilots were not trained in pilot-flying assault landing duties at the FTU.
Description: A NVG-aided assault landing.
OPR: MAJCOM/A3
Curriculum Development: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: MP (aircraft commanders) and above need to perform pilot flying duties
to credit this event. Pilot flying and MPD pilot or copilot may credit this event and dual log
AS11. FPC (copilot) may also dual log NV48. Additionally, the pilot flying the aircraft may
dual log with NV48, AS21 (if heavyweight) and P190. See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and AFI 11-2C-
130v 3 for tactics, techniques, procedures, and restrictions.
NV50 NVG Assault Takeoff
Purpose: An assault takeoff accomplished with NVGs. MPD pilots and traditional copilots were
not trained in pilot-flying assault takeoff duties at the FTU.
Description: A NVG-aided assault takeoff.
OPR: MAJCOM/A3
Curriculum Development: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: MP (Aircraft commanders) and above need to perform pilot flying
duties to credit this event. Pilot flying and MPD pilot or copilot may credit this event and dual
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 107
log AS09. FPC (copilot) may also dual log NV47. Additionally, the pilot flying the aircraft may
dual log with NV47 & P020. See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and AFI 11-2C-130v3 for tactics,
techniques, procedures, and restrictions.
NV80 NVG Instrument Approaches
Purpose: Continuation training for pilots. This event is a basic proficiency event.
Description: Practice instrument approach procedures while the flight deck crewmembers
transition from an instrument approach to a NVG landing. See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI
11-2C-130v3.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: Both pilots may log this event. The pilot flying the approach may dual
log with other instrument approach events. See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and AFI 11-2C-130v3 for
tactics, techniques, procedures, and restrictions.
7.13. Aircrew and Individual Proficiency Training (P) Events. P020 Takeoff
Description: Initial takeoff or takeoff following a touch-and-go landing.
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST
P028 Right-Seat Takeoff
Purpose: On-going training for MPD pilots to maintain right-seat proficiency flying the aircraft.
Description: Any takeoff actually accomplished (initial takeoff or takeoff following a touch-and-
go landing).
OPR: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST
Instructor: Not required
Additional Information: See applicable aircraft technical orders and AFI 11-2C-130v3. Dual log
with P020 for the pilot flying the aircraft.
P029 Left-Seat Takeoff
Purpose: On-going training for MPD pilots to maintain left-seat proficiency flying the aircraft.
Description: Any takeoff actually accomplished (initial takeoff or takeoff following a touch-and-
go landing).
OPR: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST
Instructor: Not required
Additional Information: See applicable aircraft technical orders and AFI 11-2C-130v3. Dual log
with P020 for the pilot flying the aircraft.
108 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
P070 Instrument Approach
Purpose: Training for pilots to fly Instrument Approach Procedures (IAP).
Description: Any precision (P100) or non-precision (P110) approach may be flown and credited
if the crew could safely land out of the IAP. While the entire IAP need not be flown, the portion
from the final approach fix through the decision height or missed approach and either a landing
or an ATC coordinated missed approach procedure or instructions will be accomplished.
OPR: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
P100 Precision Approach
Purpose: Training for pilots to fly using Instrument Approach Procedures with the aid of glide
slope and course guidance information.
Description: Any precision approach radar (PAR),instrument landing system (ILS), or
microwave landing system (MLS) approach may be credited if the crew could safely land out of
the IAP. While the entire IAP need not be flown, the portion from the final approach fix through
the decision height and either a landing or an ATC coordinated missed approach procedure or
instructions will be accomplished.
OPR: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
P110 Non-precision Approach
Purpose: Training for pilots to fly an instrument approach procedure with course guidance but
without the aid of glideslope information.
Description: Any VOR, TACAN, NDB, localizer, ARA, or ASR may be credited if the crew
could safely land out of the approach. While the entire IAP need not be flown, the portion from
the final approach fix through the missed approach and either a landing or an ATC coordinated
missed approach procedure or instructions will be accomplished.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
P116 NDB / VOR Approach
Purpose: Training for pilots to fly a landing using instrument approach procedure using a non-
directional beacon.
Description: Any NDB may be credited if the crew could safely land out of the approach. While
the entire IAP need not be flown, the portion from the final approach fix through the missed
approach point and either a landing or an ATC coordinated missed approach procedure or
instructions, will be accomplished.
OPR: AMC/A3T
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 109
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST
Instructor: Not required
Additional Information: Non-directional beacons are a type of non-precision navigation aids
used during IFR operations to guide the aircraft to a safe landing. Since NDBs are not usually
co-located with distance measuring equipment, positional awareness can only usually be gained
through a combination of crew coordination, NDB station passage, cross-tuning, timing, radar,
and other navigation aids. Because of these factors and others, a higher than normal degree of
crew coordination is required for many NDB approaches. Will be dual logged with P110. For
units not co-located with a NDB, aircrews may fly VOR approaches using other than the HSI
(RMI, BDHI, etc) and credit a NDB approach.
P130 Circling Approach
Purpose: Training for pilots to fly a non-precision IAP to one runway and then safely land on
another runway (at the same airport) or opposite direction.
Description: Any circling approach may be credited if the crew could safely land out of the
circling approach. While the entire non-precision IAP need not be flown, the portion from the
final approach fix through the missed approach point through the circle to either a landing or an
ATC coordinated missed approach procedure or instructions will be accomplished.
OPR: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST.
Instructor: Not required
P190 Landing
Purpose: On-going training for pilots to maintain proficiency landing the aircraft.
Description: Any landing actually accomplished (full stop, touch and go, stop and go).
OPR: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: See applicable aircraft technical orders and AFI 11-2C-130v3.
P192 Unaided Night Landing
Purpose: On-going training for pilots to maintain proficiency landing the aircraft at night without
NVGs.
Description: Any unaided landing actually accomplished (full stop, touch and go, stop and go)
between the end of evening civil twilight and the beginning of morning civil twilight, as
published in the Air Almanac.
OPR: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: May dual log with P190. Does not dual log with NV48.
110 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
P198 Right-Seat Landing
Purpose: On-going training for MPD pilots to maintain right-seat proficiency landing the
aircraft.
Description: Any landing actually accomplished (full stop, touch and go, stop and go).
OPR: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST
Instructor: Not required
Additional Information: See applicable aircraft technical orders and AFI 11-2C-130v3. Dual log
with P190 and P192 (if flown at night) for the pilot flying the aircraft.
P199 Left-Seat Landing
Purpose: On-going training for MPD pilots to maintain left-seat proficiency landing the aircraft.
Description: Any landing actually accomplished (full stop, touch and go, stop and go).
OPR: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or Level C or better WST
Instructor: Not required
Additional Information: See applicable aircraft technical orders and AFI 11-2C-130v3. Dual log
with P190 and P192 (if flown at night) for the pilot flying the aircraft.
P260 HAVE QUICK Event
Purpose: Ensures crewmembers possess a thorough knowledge of HAVE QUICK requirements.
Description: Training consists of properly configuring the radio for HAVE QUICK operation
and making at least one transmission and reception using HAVE QUICK mode of operation with
any source. The time-of-day (TOD) should be updated from a GPS or ground station master
clock if available.
OPR: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training
P270 Secure Voice Event
Purpose: Ensures crewmembers possess a thorough knowledge of secure voice requirements.
Description: Training consists of correctly loading secure voice equipment with the proper
communication protocols and communicating with another station (ground or air, beyond your
own aircraft) in the secure-voice mode.
OPR: AMC/A3T
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training
P280 Aircrew Chemical Defense Task Qualification Training (ACDTQT)
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 111
Purpose: Aircrew chemical defense continuation training for crewmembers.
Description: An exercise emphasizing hands-on training, dressed out in partial chemical defense
(CD) ensemble. Aircraft commanders will not accomplish in conjunction with a formation take-
off or a night formation departure. The purpose of the exercise is to enable crewmembers to
become aware of their limitations while wearing the equipment. Complications of heat
exhaustion, fatigue, hyperventilation, limited dexterity, and hampered communication all can be
experienced during the exercise. Observers will closely monitor crewmember actions during the
exercise. If a crewmember experiences difficulties such as excessive thermal stress,
hyperventilation, headaches, etc., and either the observer or crew member believes it is unsafe to
continue, the equipment will be immediately removed. If all requirements are not met, the
crewmember will re-accomplish the training.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3TL
Curriculum Development: HQ AMC/A3TL
Training Media: Flying helmet (if applicable), AERP ACDE equipment that includes the MBU-
19/P hood and mask assembly, CQU-7/P blower assembly with filter canisters and batteries,
MXU-835 intercom assembly. The first generation ACDE equipment that includes MBU-13/P
mask, HGU-41/P hood, CRU-80/P filter pack, MXU-835 intercom, suspension straps, and glove
set may be substituted if the unit does not have the AERP ACDE. ACDTQT should be
accomplished in a simulator with visual displays, provided a simulator exists or is available.
Instructor: If accomplished in a simulator, ATS instructors will observe the exercise, no other
supervision is required, and no restrictions apply on which or how many crewmembers may wear
the gear.
Additional Information: Prior to being scheduled for this event, each crewmember will have
completed LL03 and LL04, including LL05 criteria. If performed in the aircraft:
- Only one pilot or flight engineer will be dressed out at any time.
- An instructor pilot occupying the copilot seat will supervise the aircraft commander. An
instructor pilot or experienced aircraft commander (determined by the Sq/CC) will supervise the
MPD pilot / copilot.
- Pilots will review emergency procedures and accomplish at least one take-off, approach, and
landing, and complete all associated checklists.
- Flight engineers will be supervised by another flight engineer and wear the gear for at least one
take-off, approach, and landing, and complete all associated checklists.
- Navigators will be supervised by another navigator and wear the gear for a minimum of 30
minutes while performing navigator duties. May be accomplished while performing preflight
duties or in Satellite Navigation Trainer.
- Loadmasters will be supervised by another loadmaster and wear the gear while either loading
or unloading cargo or vehicles.
7.14. Qualification and Certification (Q) Training Events. The following codes provide the
basis for tracking aircrew qualification events and aircrew certification using the ARMS database
(see paragraph 1.8). ARMS may be used to generate a computerized letter of X’s.
112 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
MAJCOM/A3Ts may authorize additions and modifications to the purpose and description of the
codes to meet specific unit and mission requirements.
Q001 Open-Book Qualification Examination
Q002 Closed-Book Qualification Examination
Q003 Mission Evaluation
Q004 Emergency Procedures Examination
Q008 Instructor Evaluation
Q009 Tactics Open Book Exam
Q011 Flight Lead (Four-Ship Flight) Certification
Q012 Airdrop Mission Evaluation
Q013 Element Lead (Two-Ship) Certification
Q014 WC-130H Difference Certification
Q018 Mission Examinations (open and/or closed book)
Q019 Airland Mission Evaluation
Q035 Non-Assault Certification
Q036 Non-Airdrop Certification
Q050 Touch and Go Certification (Copilot & MPD Pilot; Also see Q550 for NVG)
Q051 Supervision of Pilot Touch and Go Landings Certification
Q052 Aircraft Commander Touch and Go Landing Certification
Q090 Flight Publications Check
Q100 Operational Mission Certification (OMC)
Q110 Personal Reliability Program
Q160 Instrument Refresher Course (IRC) Examination
Q170 Flight Evaluation Folder (FEF) Review
Q280 GRACC Certification
Q290 Penetration Descent Certification
Q292 MPD Left-Seat NVG Takeoff and Landing Certification
Q294 High-Altitude Arrival Certification
Q296 High-Altitude Departure Certification
Q298 Low-Altitude Arrival Certification
Q300 Low-Altitude Departure Certification
Q502 JPADS / I-CDS Certification
Q510 Aircraft Commander Certification
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 113
Q511 Flight Instructor Certification
Q512 Flight Evaluator Certification
Q513 AFRL Instructor
Q514 FTU Instructor Certification
Q520 Loadmaster Power-On Certification
Q521 JPADS Phase 1 Certification
Q522 JPADS Phase 2 Certification
Q523 LC-130 Ski Mission Certification 1 (TBD)
Q524 LC-130 Ski Mission Certification 2 (TBD)
Q525 LC-130 Ski Mission Certification 3 (TBD)
Q526 LC-130 Ski Mission Certification 4 (TBD)
Q529 AWADS
Q532 Aerial Spray Certification 1 (TBD)
Q533 Aerial Spray Certification 2 (TBD)
Q534 Aerial Spray Certification 3 (TBD)
Q535 Aerial Spray Certification 4 (TBD)
Q536 MAFFS Certified Navigator or Flight Engineer
Q537 MAFFS Certified Loadmaster
Q538 MAFFS Certified Pilot
Q539 MAFFS Certified Aircraft Commander
Q540 MAFFS Certified Instructor
Q541 GRID Navigation Certification
Q542 Unimproved Landing Certification
Q543 Functional Check Flight (FCF) Certification
Q544 Phoenix Banner Certification
Q545 Central America Certification (Deleted). See Airfield Suitability and Restrictions
Report (ASRR).
Q546 South America Certification (Deleted). See ASRR.
Q547 NVG Airdrop Certification
Q548 NVG Airland Certification
Q549 NVG Assault Airland Certification
Q550 NVG Touch & Go Certification
Q551 C-130E Difference Certification
114 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Q552 C-130H/H1 Difference Certification
Q553 C-130H2 Difference Certification
Q554 C-130H3 Difference Certification
Q555 HALO Airdrop Certification
Q565 Aerial Demo – Pilot Flying
Q566 Aerial Demo – Pilot Not Flying
Q572 Drop Zone Safety Officer (DZSO) Certification
Q573 Landing Zone Safety Officer (LZSO) Certification
Q578 C-130 AMP Certification
Q581 C-130 AMP Functional Check Flight (FCF) Certification
Note: See ASRR for more information on Certification Airfields and Special Pilot in
Command Airports (https://private.amc.af.mil/a3/a36a/A3AS/a3as.htm)
Q587 Certification Airfield – PADK, Adak NAS, AK
Q588 Certification Airfield – PALU, Cape Lisburne AFS, AK
Q589 Certification Airfield – PAEH, Cape Newenham, AK
Q590 Certification Airfield – PACZ, Cape Romanzof AFS, AK
Q591 Certification Airfield – SLLP, El Alto International, Bolivia
Q592 Certification Airfield – PAIM, Indian Mtn Long Range Radar Station (LRRS), AK
Q593 Certification Airfield – BGSF, Sondre Stromfjord, Greenland
Q594 Certification Airfield – PASV, Sparrevohn LRRS, AK
Q595 Certification Airfield – PATL, Tatlina LRRS, AK
Q596 Certification Airfield – PATC, Tin City LRRS, AK
Q597 Certification Airfield – PADU, Unalaska, AK
Q598 Certification Airfield – NZIR, McMurdo Station Ice Runway, Antarctica
Q599 Certification Airfield – NZPG, McMurdo Station Pegasus Field, Antarctica
Q600 Certification Airfield – NZWD, McMurdo Station Williams Field, Antarctica
Q601 Certification Airfield – MHTG, Toncontin Int’l (Tegucigalpa), Honduras
7.15. Arrival and Departure (RS) Events. Accomplish arrival and departure events according
to AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3.
RS06 High-Altitude Arrival Event
Purpose: These approaches are used primarily when high altitude ingress is necessary.
Crewmembers should practice high altitude arrivals from 4,000 feet AGL and above.
Description: A High-Altitude Arrival as specified in AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and AFI 11-2C-130v3.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 115
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Before performing pilot flying duties, pilots require training in a High-Altitude
Arrival. If not trained at the FTU, all pilots will demonstrate one pilot-flying High-Altitude
Arrival to the satisfaction of an instructor pilot. Copilots and MPD pilots may perform their
normal pilot monitoring duties and observe the pilot perform the maneuver. If trained in High-
Altitude Arrival pilot-flying duties, copilots and MPD pilots may perform right-seat pilot-flying
duties.
Additional Information: Aircraft commanders need to perform pilot flying duties to credit this
event. Both pilots (pilot flying and MPD pilot or copilot) may log this event. If both pilots are
current and qualified, these maneuvers may be flown on continuation training and operational
missions with passengers on board.
RS16 Low-Altitude Arrival Event
Purpose: These approaches are used primarily when low altitude ingress is necessary.
Description: These include the downwind, the overhead, the straight-in, teardrop, and abeam.
See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3 for descriptions and procedures.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Before performing pilot flying duties, pilots require training in a Low-Altitude
Arrival. If not trained at the FTU, all pilots will demonstrate one pilot-flying Low-Altitude
Arrival to the satisfaction of an instructor pilot. Copilots and MPD pilots may perform their
normal pilot-monitoring duties and observe the pilot perform the maneuver. If trained in Low-
Altitude Arrival pilot-flying duties, copilots and MPD pilots may perform right-seat pilot-flying
duties.
Additional Information: Aircraft commanders need to perform pilot flying duties to credit this
event. Both pilots (pilot flying and MPD pilot or copilot) may log this event. If both pilots are
current and qualified, this maneuver may be flown on continuation training and operational
missions with passengers on board.
RS26 High-Altitude Departure Event
Purpose: This maneuver is used primarily when a departure at medium to high altitude is
necessary.
Description: The maneuver requires a spiral climbing departure. See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or
AFI 11-2C-130v3.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Before performing pilot flying duties, pilots require training in a High-Altitude
Departure. If not trained at the FTU, all pilots will demonstrate one pilot-flying High-Altitude
Departure to the satisfaction of an instructor pilot. Copilots and MPD pilots may perform their
normal pilot-monitoring duties and observe the pilot perform the maneuver. If trained in High-
116 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Altitude Departure pilot-flying duties, copilots and MPD pilots may perform right-seat pilot-
flying duties.
Additional Information: Aircraft commanders need to perform pilot flying duties to credit this
event. Both pilots (pilot flying and MPD pilot or copilot) may log this event. If both pilots are
current and qualified, this maneuver may be flown on continuation training and operational
missions with passengers on board.
RS36 Low-Altitude Departure Event
Purpose: This maneuver is used primarily when a departure at low altitude is necessary.
Description: See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Before performing pilot flying duties, pilots require training in a Low-Altitude
Departure. If not trained at the FTU, all pilots will demonstrate one pilot-flying Low-Altitude
Departure to the satisfaction of an instructor pilot. Copilots and MPD pilots may perform their
normal pilot-monitoring duties and observe the pilot perform the maneuver. If trained in Low-
Altitude Departure pilot-flying duties, copilots and MPD pilots may perform right-seat pilot-
flying duties.
Additional Information: Aircraft commanders need to perform pilot flying duties to credit this
event. Both pilots (pilot flying and MPD pilot or copilot) may log this event. If both pilots are
current and qualified, this maneuver may be flown on continuation training and operational
missions with passengers on board.
RS46 Penetration/Rapid Descent
Purpose: Continuation training for mission-ready pilots, navigators and flight engineers.
Crewmembers should attempt to practice penetration or rapid descents from 10,000 feet AGL
and above.
Description: Provides a capability to transition from upper altitudes to a low-altitude approach
or slowdown point and airdrop. See AFTTP 3-3.C-130, TO 1C-MDS-1-1 and/or AFI 11-2C-
130v3. This event is a basic proficiency event. Once trained, MPD pilots may accomplish pilot-
flying duties from either seat.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Before performing pilot flying duties, pilots require training in a Penetration / Rapid
Descent. If not trained at the FTU, pilots will demonstrate one pilot-flying Penetration / Rapid
Descent to the satisfaction of an instructor pilot. Copilots and FPH MPD pilots may perform
their normal pilot-monitoring duties and observe the pilot perform the maneuver. If trained in
Penetration/Rapid Descent pilot-flying duties, copilots and MPD pilots may perform pilot-flying
duties.
Additional Information: Both pilots may log this event. If both pilots are current and qualified,
this maneuver may be flown on continuation training and operational missions with passengers
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 117
on board. If local airspace restrictions preclude flying a penetration or rapid descent, units may
credit this event in the simulator or through instructor-led briefing or discussion.
7.16. SKE (SK) Events. These events are for SKE qualified crewmembers. Both pilots may
log SKE events.
SK00 SKE / IMC Event
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready pilots and navigators using SKE / IMC
procedures. May be flown single ship.
Description: Log a SKE / IMC event when a minimum of a 20-minute SKE or IMC route from
assembly (or simulated assembly) to a TOT, TOA or rendezvous is accomplished when flying in
SKE formation or using IMC procedures.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3 for SKE formation
procedures.
SK07 SKE Formation Event
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready pilots and navigators using SKE formation
procedures.
Description: Log a SKE formation event when a minimum of a 20-minute SKE route from
assembly to a TOT, TOA or rendezvous is accomplished when flying in SKE formation.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
Additional Information: See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3 for SKE formation
procedures. Dual log with SK00.
SK17 SKE Lead Event
Purpose: Continuation training for SKE lead and element-lead certified mission-ready aircraft
commanders and navigators. In addition, copilots and MPD pilots will log this event per Table
4.4 when flown in the formation lead position.
Description: Log a SKE lead event when a minimum of a 20-minute SKE route from assembly
to a TOT, TOA or rendezvous is accomplished when flying in the formation lead position or
element lead position. May be flown single-ship as long as lead procedures and techniques are
used.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Instructor: Not required for continuation training.
118 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Additional Information: See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3 for SKE formation
procedures. Dual log with SK00 and SK07.
7.17. Special Certification Training (SP) Events. Applies to units that have special
certification requirements and training as defined in Chapter 5.
SP30 Pesticide Spray Sortie (1 annual for all crew positions)
Purpose: Flight continuation training for Spray-certified pilots, navigators, flight
engineers, and loadmasters.
Description: When either a pesticide, herbicide, decontaminant, or dispersant is sprayed to control
a pest, vegetation, oil spills, or decontaminate respectively. A modular aerial spray system (MASS)
is required. Log pesticide spray sorties concurrently with ULV, LV, HV, or UHV sortie as
applicable. The flight engineer will brief the host fire department and hospital or clinic on the
hazards and characteristics of the chemical and the mission; establish and monitor the aircraft
safety area for loading; and preflight the specific spray equipment.
OPR: HQ AFRC/A3TA
Curriculum Development: Unit
Training Media: Aircraft
Instructor: Not required for certified crewmembers
Additional Information: Use of the MASS is required.
SP40 Spray Sortie (1 semi-annual for all crew positions)
Purpose: Flight continuation training for Spray-certified pilots, navigators, flight engineers, and
loadmasters.
Description: A flight using all aerial spray checklists and procedures during a DGPS or visual
aerial spray sortie for swath positioning and boundary control.
OPR: HQ AFRC/A3TA
Curriculum Development: Unit
Training Media: Aircraft
Instructor: Not required for certified crewmembers
Additional Information: Use of MASS is required for loadmasters. May be dual logged with SP30 if
SP30 requirements are complied with.
SP50 Low Volume-(LV)/High Volume-(HV)/ Ultra High Volume-(UHV) Sortie (1 semi-
annual for pilots, navigators, and loadmasters)
Purpose: Flight continuation training for Spray-certified pilots, navigators, and loadmasters.
Description: Pilots/Navigators will plan, brief, and fly a LV/HV/UHV aerial spray configuration
sortie with a briefed swath width, at 100 feet above ground level (AGL) minimum altitude, over
an area with defined boundaries, factoring in the wind component, and completing a minimum of
5 swaths or 5 minutes ―spray on‖ time (time on target). Prepare topographic maps where needed.
Loadmasters will supervise the upload of the MASS for LV/HV/UHV and then operate the
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 119
system from the panel, spraying either pesticide, dispersant, or water, through a minimum of 5
swaths. Purge the system. Accomplish in flight (or on ground for loadmasters).
OPR: HQ AFRC/A3TA
Curriculum Development: Unit
Training Media: Aircraft
Instructor: Not required for certified crewmembers
Additional Information: Use of modular aerial spray system (MASS) is required for
loadmasters. May be dual logged with SP30.
SP60 Ultra Low-Volume (ULV) Sortie (1 semi-annual for pilots, navigators, and loadmasters)
Purpose: Flight continuation training for Spray-certified pilots, navigators, and loadmasters.
Description: Pilots/Navigators will plan, brief, and fly a ULV aerial spray configuration sortie
with a briefed swath width, at 150 feet above ground level (AGL) minimum altitude, over an
area with defined boundaries, factoring in the wind component, and completing a minimum of 5
swaths or 5 minutes ―spray on‖ time (time on target). Prepare topographic maps where needed.
Loadmasters will supervise the upload of the MASS for ULV and then operate the system from
the panel, spraying either pesticide, dispersant, or water, through a minimum of 5 swaths. Purge
the system. Accomplish in flight (or on ground for loadmasters).
OPR: HQ AFRC/A3TA
Curriculum Development: Unit
Training Media: Aircraft
Instructor: Not required for certified crewmembers
Additional Information: Use of modular aerial spray system (MASS) is required for
loadmasters. May be dual logged with SP30.
7.18. Survival (―SS‖) Events. AFI 16-1301 is parent regulation. In such case where there is a
conflict between this reference and the parent regulation, the parent regulation takes precedence.
HQ OPR is AMC/A3DT; Wing OPR is OSS/OSK. Courseware and guidance provided by HQ
AMC/A3DT (POC: MAJCOM SERE Functional Manager).
SS01 Local Area Survival.
Purpose: Provide familiarity with local SERE policies and procedures and preparation for
deployment. Identify environmental aspects that could affect an aircrew member in a local area,
survival scenario. Identify personnel recovery tactics, techniques, and procedures applicable to
local area flying operations.
Description: SS01 is a one-time requirement, to be accomplished prior to the first flight each
base of assignment. Units may combine and dual log with Aircrew Flight Equipment
Familiarization Training (LL01).
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T
Additional Information: Each unit is responsible for tailoring training to meet unit needs.
SS02 Combat Survival Training (CST).
120 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Purpose: Mandatory for mobility personnel required to maintain currency in S-V80-A SERE
TTPs. Training designed for crewmembers whose duties require them to fly over or deploy to
enemy territory. CST provides the crewmember an opportunity to demonstrate their ability to
operate Aircrew Flight Equipment, employ survival/evasion techniques, and rescue procedures
under combat conditions.
Description: See AFI 16-1301 and AMC Supplement. Mission Ready (MR) personnel will
receive CST not to exceed 36 months between events.
Additional Information: This course must be taught by 1T0x1 SERE Specialists or other
personnel trained IAW SERE training plans validated by the SERE MAJCOM Functional
Manager and approved by the Career Field Manager (HAF/A3O-AS).
SS03 Conduct After Capture (CAC).
Purpose: Mandatory for mobility personnel required to maintain currency in S-V80-A SERE
TTPs.
Description: Mission Ready (MR) personnel assigned to combat-coded units will receive CAC
with a currency not to exceed 36 months between events. CAC must be completed prior to being
awarded mission ready status. See AFI 16-1301 and MAJCOM supplements.
Additional Information: This course be taught by 1T0x1 SERE Specialists or other personnel
trained IAW SERE training plans validated by the SERE MAJCOM Functional Manager and
Approved by the Career Field Manager (HAF/A3O-AS).
SS05 Water Survival Training (WST).
Purpose: To provide aircrews with training necessary for a ditching or bailout over water
situation.
Description: Mission Ready (MR) personnel assigned to combat-coded units will receive water
survival training with a currency not to exceed 36 months between events. Refer to AFI 16-1301
and AMC supplement for further information.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T
SS06 Emergency Parachuting Training.
Purpose: Aircrew training geared towards the critical post ejection/egress and parachute
malfunction procedures while suspended under the parachute canopy.
Description: All personnel assigned to aircraft carrying parachutes as a means of egress or
bailout will complete this training. See AFI 16-1301 and MAJCOM supplements.
OPR: HQ AMC/A3T
SS07 Contingency SERE Indoctrination (AKA High Risk of Isolation).
Description: CSI is a Combatant Command-directed training activity and designed to prepare
high risk of isolation (HRI) personnel deploying to a specific theater of operations or
contingency. CSI is also referred to as HRC theater preparation or High Risk of Isolation (HRI),
and is usually conducted by SERE Specialists, or COCOM certified personnel. Parent regulation
is either the COCOM theater entry requirement, or the Foreign Clearance Guide, depending on
the COCOM.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 121
7.19. Global Ready Aircraft Commander Course (V). (See Chapter 5 for additional
information.)
V280 Pilot to Aircraft Commander (Phase I) See paragraph 5.3.3.4.
V281 Pilot to Aircraft Commander (Phase II) See paragraph 5.3.3.5.
V282 Pilot to Aircraft Commander (Phase III) See paragraph 5.3.3.6.
7.20. Visual Low Level (VL) Events. For each type VL event, aircraft commanders are the
final authority to determine if individual crewmembers accomplished enough training to credit
the event. Both pilots may log VL events.
VL01 Visual Low Level Day Event
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready pilots and navigators operating in the low
altitude environment using visual single-ship or formation procedures during daylight.
Description: Log a visual low-level day event when a minimum of a 20-minute route from
assembly to a TOT, TOA or rendezvous is accomplished when flying single-ship or in formation
using day visual procedures.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Additional Information: See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3.
VL11 Visual Low Level Formation Day Event
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready pilots and navigators operating in the low
altitude environment using visual formation procedures during daylight.
Description: Log a visual low-level formation day event when a minimum of a 20-minute visual
route from assembly to a TOT, TOA or rendezvous is accomplished when flying using visual
formation procedures.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Additional Information: See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3 for visual formation
procedures. Dual log with VL01.
VL21 Visual Low Level Formation Lead Event
Purpose: Continuation training for lead and element lead qualified mission-ready pilots and
navigators. Although not lead qualified, copilots and MPD pilots will log this event per Table
4.4. May be flown during the day or on NVGs.
Description: Log a visual formation lead event when a minimum of a 20-minute visual route
from assembly to a TOT, TOA or rendezvous is accomplished when flying in the formation lead
or element lead position.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
122 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Additional Information: See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3 for visual formation
procedures. Dual log with VL01 and VL11 (day) or NV00 and NV08 (night).
VL30 Medium/High to Low Altitude Transition
Purpose: Continuation training for mission-ready pilots and navigators.
Description: Log a medium/high to low altitude transition event when completing the transition
from a medium/high altitude route (should be 10,000 feet AGL and above for training) to a low-
altitude route to meet a TOT, TOA or rendezvous.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: Aircraft or USAF-certified WST.
Additional Information: See AFTTP 3-3.C-130 and/or AFI 11-2C-130v3. May dual log with the
appropriate SKE and Visual route events if specific event requirements are met. If local airspace
restrictions or other limitations preclude flying a medium/high to low altitude transition, units
may credit this event in the simulator or through instructor-led briefing / discussion.
7.21. Visual Threat Recognition and Avoidance Trainer (VTRAT) Training (VT)
Events. VTRAT is a training device designed to introduce or refresh scanners on their duties
during an anti-aircraft threat engagement. The visual simulation displays realistic visual
characteristics of anti-aircraft weaponry such as missile fly-out and AAA rate-of-fire, as seen
from the scanner’s viewpoint in the aircraft. Instruction in VTRAT is delivered in the context of
flight over a simulated threat environment. The student views this environment on a high-
resolution display system, from the perspective of his/her duty position. The student hears the
instructional text through a headset, and interacts with the trainer via a voice recognition system,
as well as the communication and flares countermeasures controls available on the real-world
aircraft. VTRAT diagnoses weak areas of student performance and emphasizes training in these
areas until mastery of the specific threat protocol is achieved. OG/CC is waiver authority for
VTRAT training.
VT01 VTRAT Initial Training
Purpose: Initial training for crewmembers.
Description: Trains crewmembers in the basics of AAA and MANPAD recognition and
avoidance. Course will be taught in a group setting (6 crewmembers, ~3hrs) followed by
~30mins of individual simulator time on the VTRAT.
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
Training Media: VTRAT device.
Additional Information: See AFTTP 3-1.Threat Guide and AFTTP 3-3.C-130.
VT03 VTRAT Refresher Training
Purpose: Continuation training for mission ready crewmembers.
Description: Refreshes crewmembers on basics of AAA and MANPAD recognition and
avoidance. Course involves 30 minutes of individual simulator time on the VTRAT (conducted
annually).
OPR: AMC/A3T/A3D
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 123
Training Media: VTRAT device.
Additional Information: See AFTTP 3-1.Threat Guide and AFTTP 3-3.C-130. Event is only
mandatory for units co-located with a VTRAT device.
7.22. Unit Defined ("X") Events. Reserved for use by local units. Publish OG/CC level
guidance documenting local event identifiers, associated ARMS nomenclature, volume, currency
and/or frequency. OG/CC should review all "X" events for relevancy to the unit's mission
during the TRP. This review will be documented in the TRP minutes.
7.23. Forms.
7.23.1. Forms Adopted. AETC FORM 6, Waiver Request, AF FORM 8, Certificate of
Aircrew Qualification, AF FORM 522, USAF Ground Weapons Training Data, AF FORM
847, Recommendation for Change of Publication, AF FORM 1042, Medical
Recommendation for Flying or Special operational Duty, AF FORM 1522, ARMS Additional
Training Accomplishment Report, DD Form 1801, DoD International Flight Plan, DD Form
1833, Isolated Personnel Report (ISOPREP), AF FORM 3526, ARMS OMR Event
Accomplishment Report, AF FORM 4005, Individual Deployment Requirements, AF FORM
4022, Aircrew Training Folder, AF FORM 4023, Aircrew Training Progress Report, AF
FORM 4024, Aircrew Training Accomplishment Report, AF FORM 4025, Aircrew
Summary/Close-out Report, AF FORM 4324, Aviation Resource Management System
(ARMS) Upgrade Worksheet.
PHILIP M. BREEDLOVE, Lt Gen, USAF
DCS, Operations, Plans and Requirements
124 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Attachment 1
GLOSSARY OF REFERENCES AND SUPPORTING INFORMATION
REFERENCES
Public Law 92-204, Appropriations Act for 1973
Public Law 93-570, Appropriations Act for 1974
Public Law 93-294, Aviation Career Incentive Act of 1974
DODD 7730.57, Aviation Career Incentive Act of 1974
DoDD 4515.13R, Air Transportation Eligibility, Nov 1994
JP-3-50, Personnel Recovery, 5 Jan 2007
AFPD 10-9, Lead Command Designation and Responsibilities for Weapon Systems, 13 Jun 2000
AFPD 10-21, Air Mobility Lead Command Roles and Responsibilities, 1 May 1998
AFI 10-245, Antiterrorism (AT), 30 Mar 2009
AFI 10-2501, Air Force Emergency Management (EM) Program Planning and Operations, 24
Jan 2007
AFI 10-403, Deployment Planning and Execution, 13 Jan 2008
AFPD 11-2, Aircraft Rules and Procedures, 14 Jan 2005
AFPD 11-3, Life Support, 9 Apr 1993
AFPD 11-4, Aviation Service, 1 Sep 2004
AFI 11-2AEv1, Aeromedical Evacuation Aircrew Training, 3 Oct 2005
AFI 11-2C-130v2, C-130 Aircrew Evaluation Criteria, 22 Feb 2006
AFI 11-2C-130v3, C-130 Operations Procedures, 14 Mar 2006
AFI 11-202v1, Aircrew Training, 17 May 2007
AFI 11-202v3, General Flight Rules, 5 Apr 2006
AFJI 11-204, Operational Procedures for Aircraft Carrying Hazardous Materials, 11 Nov 1994
AFMAN 11-210, Instrument Refresher Program (IRP), 3 Feb 2005
AFI 11-215, USAF Flight Manuals Program (FMP), 6 Apr 2005
AFI 11-218, Aircraft Operations and Movement on the Ground, 11 May 2005
AFI 11-231, Computed Air Release Point Procedures, 31 Aug 2005
AFI 11-237, Nuclear Weapons Airlift Training, 22 Nov 2007
AFI 11-289, PHOENIX BANNER, SILVER, and COPPER Operations, 16 Feb 2006
AFI 11-290, Cockpit/Crew Resource Management Training Program, 11 Apr 2001
AFI 11-301v1, Aircrew Flight Equipment (AFE) Program, 25 Feb 2009
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 125
AFI 11-401, Aviation Management, 7 Mar 2007
AFI 11-402, Aviation and Parachutist Service, Aeronautical Ratings and Badges, 10 Jul 2009
AFI 11-421, Aviation Resource Management, 1 Nov 2004
AFI 13-207, Preventing and Resisting Aircraft Piracy (Hijacking), 1 Apr 1994
AFI 13-217, Drop Zone and Landing Zone Operations, 10 May 2007
AFI 14-105, Unit Intelligence Mission and Responsibilities, 3 Jun 2002
AFI 14-202v1, Intelligence Training, 10 Mar 2008
AFI 16-1301, Survival, Evasion, Resistance, and Escape (SERE) Program, 6 Sep 2006
AFMAN 24-204, Preparing Hazardous Materials for Military Air Shipments, 1 Sep 2009
AFI 31-207, Arming and Use of Force by Air Force Personnel, 1 Sep 1999
AFI 33-360, Publications and Forms Management, 18 May 2006
AFMAN 33-363, Management of Records, 1 Mar 2008
AFI 36-2107, Active Duty Service Commitments (ADSC), 22 Apr 2005
AFI 36-2101, Classifying Military Personnel (Officer and Enlisted), 7 Mar 2006
AFI 36-2201v1, Training Development, Delivery, and Evaluation, 26 Mar 2009
AFI 36-2226, Combat Arms Program, 26 Feb 2003
AFMAN 36-2236, Guidebook for Air Force Instructors, 12 Nov 2003
AFI 36-2238, Self-Aid and Buddy Care Training, 19 Jan 2006
AFI 36-2251, Management of Air Force Training Systems, 20 Mar 2003
AFI 48-123v1, Medical Examinations and Standards, 5 Jun 2006
AFI 48-123v3, Flying and Special Operational Duty, 5 Jun 2006
AFI 51-401, Training and Reporting Compliance with the Laws of Armed Conflict, 17 Dec 2008
AFTTP 3-1.C-130, Tactical Employment, C-130E/H, 16 Feb 2007
AFTTP 3-3.C-130, Combat Aircraft Fundamentals – C-130E/H, 16 Feb 2007
AMCH 11-214, AMC Aircrew Hazardous Materials Handbook, 15 Feb 2008
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
AATTC— Advanced Airlift Tactical Training Center
AC— Aircraft Commander
ACC— Air Combat Command
ACDE— Aircrew Chemical Defense Ensemble
ACDTQT— Aircrew chemical defense task qualification training
AD— Airdrop
126 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
ADS— Aircraft Defensive System
AE— Aeromedical Evacuation
AECM— Aeromedical Evacuation Crew Member
AETC— Air Education and Training Command
AF— Air Force
AFC— Aircrew Fundamentals Course
AFE— Aircrew Flight Equipment
AFFSA— Air Force Flight Standards Agency
AFMC— Air Force Material Command
AFRC— Air Force Reserve Command
AFSOC— Air Force Special Operations Command
AG/CC— Airlift Group Commander
AGL— Above Ground Level
AMC— Air Mobility Command
AMCAOS— Air Mobility Command Air Operations Squadron
AMP— Airfield Marking Pattern
AMP— Avionics Modernization Program
ANG— Air National Guard
ARA— Airborne Radar Approach
ARC— Air Reserve Component (ANG and AFRC)
ARMS— Aviation Resource Management System
AT— Academic Training
ATD— Aircrew Training Device
ATS— Aircrew Training System
AWADS— Adverse Weather Aerial Delivery System
AZAR— Assault Zone Availability Report
BAQ— Basic Aircraft Qualified
BMC— Basic Mission Capable
BDU— Bomb Dummy Unit
CBT— Computer-Based Training
CC— Commander or appropriate AFRC/ANG Operations Supervisor
CCWG— Courseware Configuration Working Group
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 127
CDS— Container Delivery System
CEA— Career Enlisted Aviator
CLS— Contractor Logistic Support
COMSEC— Communications security
CONOPS— Concept of Operations
CONUS— Continental United States
CoP— Community of Practice
CP— Copilot
CPT— Cockpit Procedures Trainer
CRM— Crew Resource Management
CRO— COMSEC Responsible Officer
CSO— Combat Systems Operator
CST— Combat SERE Training
CTD— Celestial Training Device
CUR— Currency
CWD— Chemical Warfare Defense
DeMS— Deployment Management System
DNIF— Duty Not Involving flying
DO— Deputy Commander for Operations
DOD— Department of Defense
DOC— Designed operational capability
EAR— Event Accomplishment Report
ECP— Engineering Change Proposal
ENAF— Emergency Nuclear Airlift Force
EPT— Emergency Parachuting Training
ETCA— Education and Training Course Announcements
FAIP— First Assignment Instructor Pilot
FE— Flight Engineer
FEB— Flying Evaluation Board
FEF— Flight evaluation folder
FP— Flight Pilot
FS— Flight Surgeon
128 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
FTL— Flying Training Level
FTU— Formal Training Unit
FuT— Fuselage Trainer
GRACC— Global Ready Aircraft Commander Course
GT— Ground Training
HAHO— High Altitude High Opening
HALO— High Altitude Low Opening
HARMS— Host Aviation Resource Management System
HVAA— High Value Airborne Asset
HQ— Headquarters
ICW— Interactive Courseware
IF— Instructor Flight Engineer
IFF/SIF— Identification, Friend or Foe
IL— Instructor Loadmaster
ILS— Instrument Landing System
IMC— Instrument Meteorological Conditions
IN— Instructor Navigator
IP— Instructor Pilot
IQT— Initial Qualification Training
IR— Infrared
IRC— Instrument Refresher Course
ISOPREP— Isolated Personnel Report
JA/ATT— Joint Airborne/Air Transportability Training
LAD— Loadmaster Aerial Delivery
LM— Loadmaster
LOP— Line of Position
LPS— Local Proficiency Sortie
LRT— Loadmaster Refresher Training
LZ— Landing Zone
MAFFS— Modular Airborne Fire Fighting System
MAJCOM— Major Command
MC— Mission Commander
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 129
MDS— Mission-Design-Series (e.g., C-130 vice HC-130)
MEP— Mission Essential Personnel
MLS— Microwave Landing System
MMCT— MAFFS Mission Certification Training
MOB— Main Operating Base
MOST— Mission Oriented Simulator Training
MP— Mission Pilot
MPD— Mobility Pilot Development
MQF— Master Question File
MQT— Mission Qualification Training
MR— Mission Ready
MSL— Mean Sea Level
MSSR— Media Selection Syllabus Report
MX— Maintenance
N/A— Not Applicable
NAF— Numbered Air Force
NMR— Non-Mission Ready
NVD— Night Vision Devices
NVG— Night Vision Goggles
OCONUS— Outside the Continental United States
OFT— Operational Flight Trainer
OG— Operations Group
OG/CC— Operations Group Commander
OMAR— Objective Media Analysis Report
OMC— Operational Mission Certification
OPORD— Operations Order
OPR— Office of Primary Responsibility
OSA— Operational Support Aircraft
PAA— Primary Aircraft Authorization
PACAF— Pacific Air Forces
PAI— Primary Aircraft Inventory
PAMS— Pilot Absorption Management System
130 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
PCS— Permanent Change of Station
PFT— Programmed Flying Training
PLD— Personnel Lowering Device
PM— Program Manager
PO— Project Officer
POC— Point of Contact
PQP— Prior Qualified Pilot
PRD— Program Requirements Document
PTT— Part Task Trainer
QA— Quality Assurance
QAR— Quality Assurance Representative
QMS— Quality Management System
RDS— Records Disposition Schedule
RPL— Required Proficiency Level
RTRB— Realistic Training Review Board
RWR— Radar Warning Receiver
SAFE— Selected Area for Evasion
SAR— Search and Rescue
SARMS— Squadron Aviation Resource Management System
SATB— Standard Airdrop Training Bundle
SATCOM— Satellite Communications
SCNS— Self-Contained Navigation System
SIF— Selected Identification Features
SIM— Simulator
SIMCERT— Simulator Certification
SKE— Station Keeping Equipment
SME— Subject Matter Expert
SNS— Satellite Navigation Station
SOC— Senior Officers Course
SOE— Standards of Evaluation
SORTS— Status of Resources and Training System
Sq/CC— Squadron Commander
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 131
Sq/DO— Squadron Operations Officer
TACC— Tanker/Airlift Control Center
TDY— Temporary Duty
TL— Training Level
TOT— Time-Over-Target
TRP— Training Review Panel
TTU— Technical Training Unit
UC— Unqualified Copilot
UF— Unqualified Flight Engineer
UL— Unqualified Loadmaster
UN— Unqualified Navigator
UNQ— Unqualified
UP— Unqualified Aircraft Commander
UPT— Undergraduate Pilot Training
USAF— United States Air Force
USAFE— United States Air Forces in Europe
USAF EC— United States Air Force Expeditionary Center
USAFWS— USAF Weapons School
UTA— Unit Training Assembly
VFR— Visual Flight Rules
VMC— Visual Meteorological Conditions
VLL— Visual Low-Level
VTRAT— Visual Threat Recognition and Avoidance Trainer
Wg/CC— Wing Commander
WST— Weapon System Trainer
WX— Weather
TERMS
AC Candidate— An individual designated by the Sq/CC or appropriate AFRC/ANG Operations
Supervisor for entry into training before a formal aircraft commander upgrade course. While
under the direct supervision of an IP, aircraft commander candidates may perform all flight
maneuvers authorized for a qualified aircraft commander.
Academic training (AT)— A course of instruction that includes, but is not limited to, classroom
instruction related to aircraft systems and operation, flight characteristics and techniques;
132 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
performance; and normal, abnormal, and emergency procedures. Generally, academic courses
should be completed prior to simulator or flight training.
Adverse Weather Aerial Delivery System (AWADS)— An avionics and radar system
designed to allow aircrews to perform aerial delivery missions during Instrument Meteorological
Conditions (IMC)
Aeromedical Evacuation (AE)— The movement of patients under medical supervision to and
between medical treatment facilities by air transportation.
Aeromedical Evacuation Crew Member (AECM)— Qualified flight nurses, AE technicians,
and unqualified student trainees performing AE duties under the direct supervision of a qualified
instructor or flight examiner.
Airborne Radar Approach (ARA)— A non-precision approach accomplished by a navigator
directing the pilot through a letdown using onboard radar as the primary equipment.
Aircraft Commander (AC)— Pilot who has been certified to perform "pilot-in-command"
duties.
Aircraft Systems Refresher— Any of several crew position unique systems refresher courses.
Aircrew Training Device (ATD)— Hands-on training aids including, but not limited to, cockpit
procedure trainers (CPT), part task trainers (PTT), satellite navigation systems (SNS),
operational flight trainers (OFT), and weapons systems trainers (WST).
Aircrew Training System (ATS)— An integrated qualification, upgrade, and continuation
training program for crewmembers. Civilian contractors conduct most academic and ATD
training while USAF conducts all flight training and flight evaluation.
Airdrop (AD) Mission— A flight that involves delivery of cargo or personnel by airdrop
methods.
Airdrop Procedure— Log an event when a successful airdrop is accomplished. See
Attachment 4 for additional guidance and exceptions.
Airdrop Scoring— Log an airdrop event if the load exits the aircraft and is scored as a
successful drop. See Attachment 4 for additional guidance and exceptions.
Airland Mission— A flight that involves the delivery of cargo or personnel between airfields.
Ancillary Training— Guidance or instruction that contributes to mission accomplishment, but
is separate from an Air Force Specialty or occupational series.
Annual Training— Training required in the next year after training was accomplished (i.e., 1
Jan 09 to 31 Dec 10). If training is accomplished anytime in 2009, the next training is due by 31
Dec 10. For 109AW, the ground training year is defined as 1 April to 31 March.
Basic Aircraft Qualified (BAQ)— A crewmember who has satisfactorily completed Phase I
training and is qualified to perform limited aircrew duties in the unit aircraft, but is not mission
qualified in his or her assigned aircraft.
Basic Mission Capable (BMC)— A crewmember who has satisfactorily completed Phase I and
Phase II training. The BMC crewmember does not maintain MR status, but maintains
familiarization in the unit operational mission. The BMC crewmembers maintain qualifications
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 133
so that they are worldwide deployable and may be used for Phase 1 (Airland Operations). BMC
crewmembers should be able to attain full qualification (MR) in the unit mission within 45 days,
if needed.
Biennial— Training required in the second year after training was accomplished (i.e., 1 Jan 09 to
31 Dec 11). If training is accomplished anytime in 2009, the next training is due by 31 Dec 11.
Certify/Certification— The process of documenting that an individual is trained and qualified
to perform in a given capacity. Normally accomplished by the Sq/CC.
Cockpit Procedures Trainer (CPT)— A training device in which instruments and displays are
activated to respond to trainee inputs. Used for safety of flight, instrument, normal, and
emergency procedures.
Communications Security (COMSEC)— COMSEC material, other than equipment or devices,
that assists in securing communications and which is required in the production, operation, or
maintenance of COMSEC systems and their components. Examples are keys, codes,
authentication information in physical or electronic form, call signs, frequencies, and supporting
documents.
Computer—Based Training (CBT) - Ground training system that uses computer-generated
graphics or text in conjunction with interactive programs as the primary medium of instruction.
COMSEC Responsible Officer (CRO)— Individual appointed by a unit commander to oversee
the unit's COMSEC program as outlined in AFI 33 - 211, Communications Security (COMSEC)
User Requirements.
Container Delivery System (CDS)— Equipment or materiel rigged and airdropped from the
aircraft using roller conveyors and gravity extraction.
Continuation Training— Ground and flight training events necessary to BAQ, BMC, or MR
status. The continuation training program provides crewmembers with the volume, frequency,
and mix of training necessary to perform unit’s missions.
Conversion Training— Training necessary to qualify unit personnel in a different MDS aircraft
(generally a new MWS) or mission employment system. The requirement is dependent on unit
Designed Mission Capability and qualification training may require an evaluation or AF Form 8.
Copilot (CP)— Pilot qualified to perform duties in the right seat only.
Copilot MAFFS Training Airdrop Event— Plan, brief, and fly a MAFFS airdrop profile
consisting of a minimum of 2 simulated (dry) airdrops and 1 actual (wet) airdrop while following
a United States Forest Service lead plane.
Crew Resource Management (CRM)— Training concept that emphasizes team effectiveness
by enhancing individual and crew performance in communication, situational awareness,
effective leadership and management, and crew coordination.
Critical Phases of Flight— Takeoff, low-level (below MSA), airdrop, approach, and landing.
Cross—Flow Crewmember - A crewmember who has military flying experience with the
majority of his/her flying experience in a weapon system other than the C-130.
Currency Event— Flying continuation training events with prescribed maximum interval-
between-accomplishment shown in the "CUR" column.
134 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Cycle— The 17-month interval based on in-flight evaluation completion date.
Difference Training— Training necessary to qualify an individual in a different aircraft or
mission employment system within the same MDS in which currently qualified. Qualification
does not require an evaluation or AF Form 8.
Direct Supervision— A crewmember is considered under direct supervision when flying with
an instructor in the same crew position. For pilots the IP will occupy one of the pilot seats. For
other crew positions, the instructor will be readily available to assume the primary duties if
required.
Dry Pass— Planned aerial delivery pass in which no equipment or personnel exit the aircraft.
Education and Training Course Announcements (ETCA)— Reference for formal courses
giving MAJCOM procedures, security requirements, reporting instructions, clothing
requirements and location information. https://etca.randolph.af.mil/
Event or Task— A training item to be accomplished. Several events or tasks constitute a
training profile.
Familiarization Item— An item completed by demonstration, observation or in - seat
experience. Proficiency is not required.
Flight Engineer— Crewmember qualified to perform flight engineer duties.
Flight Examiner— A crewmember certified according to AFI 11-202v1 and 2, to administer
evaluations.
Flight Surgeon (FS)— Medical doctor qualified to perform flight surgeon duties and has current
aeronautical orders in that Air Force Specialty Code.
Flying Training Level (FTL)— A standard assigned to crew members, based upon experience
and Sq/CC recommendation, directing flying continuation training requirements.
Formal School— An Air Force unit designated to conduct qualification training; synonymous
with Flying Training Unit (FTU).
Formal School Courseware— Training materials and programs developed for training
crewmembers at formal schools. It includes all student study guides, workbooks, computer-
based training lessons, slide tape lessons, instructor guides, and applicable training forms related
to the specific course. Training courses listed in ETCA. Formal courses may be conducted
using the secondary method (in-unit) of training.
Formal Training— Any ETCA or ATS course leading to certification or qualification.
Different from remedial or unit-directed training in that formal training has a syllabus and
MAJCOM directed or approved course of instruction.
Formation— Two or more aircraft under the command of a designated mission commander or
formation leader, operating in close proximity to each other.
Heavy Equipment Drop— Equipment or materiel rigged and airdropped from the aircraft using
roller conveyors, side rails, and parachute extraction systems.
High Altitude— 10,000' MSL to 17,999' MSL
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 135
Initial Qualification Training (IQT)— Training needed to qualify a crewmember for basic
crew duties in an assigned position for a specific aircraft, without regard for the unit's operational
mission.
Instructor— A crewmember who is certified according to AFI 11-202v1 and 2, to train other
crewmembers of like specialty.
Loadmaster— A crewmember fully qualified to perform loadmaster duties.
Loadmaster MAFFS Airdrop Training Event—- Perform air/retardant servicing and all other
loadmaster duties required to fly a MAFFS airdrop profile consisting of two actual airdrops.
Low Altitude— 1000' AGL to 2999' AGL
Mass CDS— For training, four or more CDS bundles.
Medium Altitude— 3000' AGL to 9,999' MSL
Mission Oriented Simulator Training (MOST)— Part of a training program (e. g., crew
resource management) that includes a practical application, full-mission scenario in the simulator
or weapons system trainer.
Mission Qualification Training (MQT)— The training necessary to qualify a crewmember in a
specific crew position to perform the command or unit operational mission. MQT completion is
a prerequisite for MR status.
Mission ready (MR)— A mission-ready crewmember is defined as one who is available for
operational tasking and deployment, qualified (completed crew position qualification training,
unit indoctrination, and applicable continuation training), and certified in the squadron's
mission(s) according to the unit's Designed Operational Capability (DOC) statement. The
crewmember will be current in all ground and flying training prescribed in Chapter 2 through
Chapter 4 (as appropriate).
Modular Airborne Fire Fighting System (MAFFS)— Specialized equipment mounted in the
cargo compartment used to dispense flame retardants in support of joint fire fighting missions
with the US Forest Service
Navigator— Crewmember qualified to perform navigator duties.
Night Event— Log a night event when accomplished between the end of evening civil twilight
and the beginning of morning civil twilight, as published in the American Air Almanac.
Night Sortie— Log a night sortie when the mission takeoff or landing is accomplished between
the end of evening civil twilight and the beginning of morning civil twilight, as published in the
American Air Almanac.
Non—current - Failure to meet the minimum prescribed currency requirements in a training
period for a given event.
Non—Mission Ready (NMR) - Individual who is non-current in required continuation training
or unqualified in the aircraft, or is not otherwise certified to perform the unit’s mission(s).
NOTE: BMC and BAQ crewmembers current, qualified, and appropriately certified are MR
even though they may not be fully trained, qualified, or certified in all aspects of the unit’s
mission.
136 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
NVG crewmember— Any crewmember who has completed NVG ground and flying training as
prescribed in Chapter 5 of this instruction.
Off—Station Training Flight - Any training mission that remains over night (RON) at a base
other than home station, or carries cargo or passengers.
Open Snow— An area of relatively smooth snow that is continuous in nature, allowing for LC-
130 ski operations. No skiway markings or grooming has been done in this area.
Operational Flight Trainer (OFT)— a crew training device that does not fully duplicate a
cockpit or portion of the aircraft. Examples of OFTs include cockpit procedure trainers, satellite
navigation stations, or fuselage trainers.
Part Task Trainer (PTT)— A device used to practice a specific task such as cargo loading
training.
Pilot MAFFS Training Airdrop Event— Plan, brief, and fly a MAFFS airdrop profile
consisting of a minimum of 2 simulated (dry) airdrops and 1 actual (wet) airdrop while following
a USFS lead plane.
Polar Airdrop— Primary method of airdrop qualification is through the FTU at Little Rock
AFB. Run-ins for polar airdrop are from an ARA. No formation, low-level routes, curvilinear
approaches or personnel airdrops will be conducted.
Primary Aircraft Authorization (PAA)— Aircraft authorized for performance of the
operational mission. The PAA forms the basis for allocation of operating resources to include
manpower, support equipment, and flying-hour funds. The operating command determines the
PAA required for their assigned missions. PAI also includes test and training requirements.
Primary Aircraft Inventory (PAI)— Aircraft assigned to meet the primary aircraft
authorization.
Primary method— Training conducted at a designated location using a MAJCOM approved
syllabus, e.g., initial qualification courses conducted at Little Rock AFB.
Proficiency— The degree of skill achieved from accomplishing a prescribed minimum number
of training events to accomplish the unit's mission.
Proficiency Advance— The ATS contractor site manager (for ATS academic training taught at
the FTU) or the flying squadron DO may waive requisites with the training curriculum or ―Total
Number Required‖ repetitions for highly skilled crewmembers if recommended by their
instructor.
Quality Assurance Representative (QAR)— Member of the wing or group staff designated to
verify and evaluate contractor performance according to the ATS quality assurance program
plan, mandated by Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR).
Quarter— Any of four three-month periods defined as 1 January to 31 March, 1 April to 30
June, 1 July to 30 September, and 1 October to 31 December.
Refresher Simulator— Simulator training emphasizing aircraft systems, normal and emergency
procedures, and mission-specific training requirements.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 137
Remote Fueling Operations— Aircraft refuel/defuel and fuel delivery from aircraft tanks or
internal tanks used to support remote Arctic/Antarctic operations with aircraft engines running
(not to include the APU) that require special operating procedures and equipment.
Requalification Training— Training required to qualify crewmembers in an aircraft/mission in
which they have been previously qualified.
Secondary Method— Training conducted at a location not designated as an FTU using
MAJCOM approved syllabus, e. g., mission qualification course or instructor upgrade conducted
at a line unit.
Semiannual— The 6-month training periods from 1 January to 30 June and 1 July to 31
December. For 109AW, the semiannual periods are 1 April to 30 September and 1 October to 31
March.
Significant Training Event— A training event directly contributing to qualification and
upgrade, e.g., CBT lesson, weapon system trainer (WST), ground training, flight, etc.
Simulated Airdrop— A maneuver during which all standard procedures and signals are
followed, but an aerial release is not made. Applicable doors or ramp need not be opened.
Similar to a dry pass.
Ski ARA— A self-contained, non-precision, instrument approach where the navigator directs the
pilot through a let-down, traffic pattern, and final approach using the aircraft radar and other
navigational aids installed on the aircraft.
Ski Combat Offload Training— Ski combat offload training will prepare aircrews to offload
unusual cargo loads in the polar environment and other locations with limited material handling
equipment. Ski combat offload procedures and the checklists are included in AFI 11-2C-130v3.
Ski Landing— A landing made onto a prepared skiway, open snow or sea ice on skis. Copilots
are not authorized to perform ski landings, however they will log this event when performing
copilot duties.
Ski Landing Area— A designated area for LC-130 ski operations that does not meet the criteria
of a skiway but is marked and maintained IAW proper directives. It may permit ski operations
without a SAR aircraft.
Ski Operations— Ski operational sorties include a ski takeoff and/or ski landing from a
prepared skiway, open snow or sea ice landing area. Ski combat offload and remote fueling
operations may, also, be conducted.
Ski Sortie— Log when a ski takeoff and/or ski landing is accomplished.
Ski Takeoff— A takeoff from a prepared skiway, open snow or sea ice on skis. Pilots and
copilots log this event. Copilots are not authorized to perform ski takeoffs, however they will
log this event when performing copilot duties.
Skiway— A designated area for LC-130 ski operations that is marked and maintained in
accordance with proper directives and has a published instrument approach procedure
Special Mission— Any mission requiring special qualification or specific unit missions that
include MAFFS, Spray, Ski, Weather, etc.
138 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Special Qualification— A qualification above mission qualification required to accomplish a
special mission.
Specialized Training— Training for specialized tactics, weapons systems, or flight
responsibilities.
Standard Airdrop Training Bundle— A 15-pound training bundle that may be dropped to
simulate personnel, equipment, or CDS airdrops.
Super E— C-130H (tail numbers AF73-01580 through AF73-01599) versus a C-130H1.
Supervised Training Status— A crewmember will fly under instructor supervision as
designated by the Sq/CC or flight examiner. This status is usually a result of loss of currency or
qualification, or due to evaluation resulting in other than Qualification Level 1.
TF Coded— Designated Training Aircraft.
Training devices— All trainers, computer assisted instruction, sound-on-slide programs, videos,
and mockups designed to prepare students for flight training or augment prescribed continuation
training.
Training level (TL)— A standard assigned to crewmembers, by the Sq/CC, directing
continuation- training requirements.
Training Review Panel (TRP)— A panel used to review staff and crew management actions
necessary to complete the squadrons' flight and ground training programs.
Transition (TX) Training— Training necessary to qualify unit personnel in a different MDS
aircraft or mission employment system. Transition Training is a shortened version of initial
qualification training that gives aircrew members cross-flowing from another military aircraft
credit for acquired aviation proficiency. For Combat Delivery C-130 aircraft, transfer between C-
130E/H, C-130 AMP, and C-130J will be Transition Training using specific courseware.
Triennial— Training required in the third year after training was accomplished (i.e., 1 Jan 09 to
31 Dec 12). If training is accomplished anytime in 2009, the next training is due by 31 Dec 12.
Unqualified— A crewmember is unqualified under the following circumstances cases:
1. Failure to successfully pass an evaluation according to AFI 11—2C-130v2, or
2. Failure to accomplish an evaluation in the time frame required by AFI 11—2C-130v2, or
3. Non—current flight training events in excess of six months as specified by this AFI, or
4. Determined administratively by Sq/CC or higher authority, or
5. Never qualified in the aircraft.
Upgrade Training— Training to qualify a crewmember in a higher crew qualification (i.e.,
aircraft commander, instructor, or evaluator) or specialized certification (i.e., grid, HALO, or
NVG).
Very High Altitude— 18,000' MSL and above.
Very Low Altitude— Surface to 999' above ground level (AGL).
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 139
Weapon System Trainer (WST)— Device that provides synthetic flight and tactics
environment in which aircrews learn, develop, improve, and integrate skills associated with their
crew position.
140 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Attachment 2
AIRCREW TRAINING DOCUMENTATION
A2.1. General Information. This attachment provides guidelines on proper training
documentation. Instructions are provided for AF Form 4022, Aircrew Training Folder, AF Form
4023, Aircrew Training Progress Report, AF Form 4024, Aircrew Training Accomplishment
Report, AF Form 4025, Aircrew Summary/Close-out Report, and aircrew training guides.
A2.1.1. Initiate a training folder for ETCA formal training courses (formal school or in-unit),
mission certification, special qualification, certification training, in-unit upgrade program to
the next higher crew qualification, requalification training (formal school or in-unit), and all
corrective action or additional training. If the training can be accomplished on one mission, a
training folder is not required. Once approved for use by MAJCOM/A3T, FTUs and units
may use the Training Management System or other government-approved electronic system
in lieu of AF 4022, AF 4023, AF 4024, and AF 4025.
A2.1.1.1. The unit operations officer may waive the training folder requirement if
corrective action or additional training is limited. If initiated, the instructor or flight
examiner who evaluated the aircrew member's performance will enter comments
pertinent to the training deficiency on AF Form 4023 or the training guide. Use the
existing AF Form 4022 for end-of-course evaluations that result in additional training.
A2.1.1.2. For a crewmember undergoing more than one training program in a short
period of time the unit may combine all training into one AF Form 4022; e.g., an
experienced C-130 aircraft commander returning to fly may have his or her unit
indoctrination and applicable airland or mission qualification training, formation lead
training, and instructor requalification training combined in one folder.
A2.1.2. Access to Training Records. Squadrons will maintain training folders for their
personnel in a location readily accessible at all times to instructors and supervisory
personnel. Students may review their folder(s) during normal duty hours.
A2.1.3. Instructor Procedures. The instructor or trainer will review the training folder, to
include AF Forms 4023 and 4024 or the training guide, prior to all training periods. Those
areas not previously accomplished or those, in which crewmembers require additional
training, will be noted for possible inclusion during the current training period.
A2.1.4. Training Folder Review. Operations officers will review active training folders
quarterly, and flight commanders or squadron training representatives will conduct a monthly
review. Monthly and quarterly reviews will be annotated on AF Form 4023 or in the training
guide.
A2.1.5. Completion of Training. Upon completion of training, an AF Form 4025 may be
generated. The original copy will be placed in the student’s training folder or in a permanent
training folder, as specified in the MAJCOM supplement. See paragraph A2.5.1
A2.1.5.1. Formal School Disposition of Training Records. Formal schools will send the
original AF Form 4022 with all training records to the student's gaining unit within ten
working days of the student’s graduation or departure. Sq/CCs will review formal school
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 141
training records and enter appropriate comments on the training guide progress record or
AF Form 4023.
A2.1.5.2. Specific to PACAF and USAFE. After one year, training offices will retain
the AF Form 4025 in the crewmember’s Permanent Training Record. Refer to the Air
Force Records Disposition Schedule (RDS) located at https://www.my.af.mil/gcss-
af61a/afrims/afrims/rims.cfm for further guidance.
A2.1.5.3. Disposition of Training Records. All squadron training offices that do not
maintain Permanent Training Records will retain all AF Forms 4022 contents until one
year after training close out and then return them to the crewmember. No unit will insert
AF Forms 4022, 4023, 4024, 4025 or training guides into FEFs. Refer to the Air Force
Records Disposition Schedule (RDS) located at https://www.my.af.mil/gcss-
af61a/afrims/afrims/rims.cfm for further guidance.
A2.1.6. If training guides are not used, AF Forms 4022, 4023, or 4024 will be used for ATS
and formal school courses.
A2.1.7. Units may overprint versions of AF Forms 4022, 4023, 4024, or 4025 in accordance
with AFI 33-360v2, Forms Management Programs.
A2.1.8. For purposes of training documentation, ―classroom only‖ training conducted at the
unit should be identified as Academic Training (AT). Ground Training (GT) will be
considered all academic training conducted outside the classroom. Academic training
conducted while performing flying duties will be documented as Flying Training.
A2.1.9. AF Form 4022 Closure. The Training Folder is considered closed upon successful
completion of the final event required by the training program. Final training events include
flight evaluation; instructor validation of training (i.e. "sign-off" flight); and/or Squadron
Commander Certification.
A2.2. Instructions for AF Form 4022, Aircrew Training Folder. . This folder is constructed
of hard stock paper. The inside cover has tables for documenting training. AF Forms 4023,
4024, 4025, training guides, and additional information (waivers, etc.) will be attached through
the centered holes of the folder. Obtain a folder through the AF publications distribution
system (see web site address on first page of this instruction).
NOTE: Formal school instructors using ATS courseware are not required to complete the
following sections of the AF Form 4022: Ground training summary, written evaluations, and
flying training summary if this information is tracked by other means and sent to the gaining unit
with AF Form 4022.
A2.2.1. Trainee Information (cover): Provides trainee and course information.
A2.2.1.1. Name and grade. Self-explanatory.
A2.2.1.2. Aircrew position. Self-explanatory. (For crewmembers in an upgrade
program, enter the aircrew position to which they are upgrading).
A2.2.1.3. Unit of assignment. Self-explanatory.
A2.2.1.4. Type of training. Enter formal course title or, for special mission qualification,
enter type, e.g. formation lead, etc. For other types of training, enter a descriptive
identifier.
142 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
A2.2.1.5. Class number. Enter formal school class number; otherwise, leave blank.
A2.2.1.6. Course number: Enter only the ETCA formal course number, e.g.,
"C130PIQ123" etc. Otherwise, leave blank.
A2.2.2. Ground Training Summary (inside left). This section provides a chronological
record of ground training events. Record non-flying training events. Entries are required for
CTD, OFT, PTT, WST, or GT. Entries are required on the AF Form 4022 for inunit
academic instruction conducted according to formal school courseware. Identify classroom
academic training as AT.
A2.2.2.1. Date. Selfexplanatory.
A2.2.2.2. Training period. Enter sequentially numbered training period designators, e.g.
"CPT-1," "WST-2," "GT-3,‖ etc., or specific course identifier.
A2.2.2.3. Status. Enter incomplete (INC) and the reason, e.g. "INC-MX" (maintenance)
or "INC-WX" (weather); otherwise, leave blank.
A2.2.2.4. Instructor or trainer (qualification). Enter the name of the instructor or trainer
and aircrew qualification, e.g. aircraft commander (AC), instructor pilot (IP), instructor
navigator (IN), etc.
A2.2.2.5. Training time. Self-explanatory. Do not include time normally associated
with prebriefing and debriefing.
A2.2.3. Training Period Designators. Codes to describe training periods. Formal training
schools may use more descriptive designators if required.
A2.2.4. Written Evaluations. Record data for the in-flight evaluation required to complete
the training program.
A2.2.4.1. Date. Enter the date the written evaluation was satisfactorily completed.
A2.2.4.2. Type. Enter the AFI 11-2C-130v2 description or other appropriate identifier.
A2.2.4.3. Grade. Enter according to AFI 11-2C-130v2.
A2.2.5. Performance Evaluation Summary. Record data on required evaluations including
reevaluations (if applicable).
A2.2.5.1. Date recommended. Enter the date recommended for a performance
evaluation (CPT, OFT, WST, or flight).
A2.2.5.2. Type evaluation. Enter AFI 11-2C-130v2 evaluation description or other
appropriate identifier.
A2.2.5.3. Instructor (qualification). Enter the name and aircrew qualification of the
instructor recommending the student for an evaluation.
A2.2.5.4. Operations review. With the initials of the reviewer, indicate a records review
has been accomplished following recommendation for an evaluation.
NOTE: Flight commanders or supervisors will accomplish reviews during formal training
courses. Sq/CC or operations officer will review before flight evaluations.
A2.2.5.5. Date evaluated. Enter the date the evaluation was completed.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 143
A2.2.5.6. Evaluator. Selfexplanatory.
A2.2.5.7. Grade. Enter according to AFI 11-2C-130v2.
A2.2.6. Flying Training Summary. This section provides a chronological record of flying
training sorties. Log all sorties scheduled even if canceled by external factors such as
weather (WX) or maintenance (MX).
A2.2.6.1. Date. Selfexplanatory. On operational missions, enter inclusive dates, e.g., 28
Jul - 7 Aug 04.
A2.2.6.2. Training period. Enter sequentially numbered training period designators, e.g.,
"S-1," "AD-1," "O-2," etc. Formal schools may use syllabus-directed training event
identifier.
A2.2.6.3. Status. Enter "INC" and reasons, "WX," "MX," or "PRO" when an additional
training flight, over those remaining, will be required to accomplish lost training events
originally scheduled for that period (INC-WX); otherwise, leave blank.
A2.2.6.4. Instructor (qualification). Enter the name and aircrew qualification of the
instructor.
A2.2.6.5. Mission time. Enter the total flight-time of the training or operational mission
in the top half of the block. If documentation of seat-time is required, enter the flight-
time the trainee was actually in the seat in the lower half of the block.
A2.2.6.6. Cumulative time. Use this block to enter the individual's total cumulative
flight-time in the specific training course. Enter total cumulative flight-time in the top
half of the block and, if required, the total cumulative seat-time in the lower half of the
block. If seat time is not applicable, leave lower half of the block blank.
A2.2.7. Performance and Knowledge Standards. (For use with AF Form 4024, see
paragraph A2.4.11.)
A2.2.8. Grading Codes. (For use with AF Form 4024, see paragraph A2.4.8)
A2.3. Instructions for the AF Form 4023, Aircrew Training Progress Report. This form
provides a narrative description of training missions and is also used for documenting operations
review of training progress. File AF Forms 4023 on the left side of the AF Form 4022 in order
with the most recent flight on top. NOTE: AF Form 4023 or a training guide may be used to
record training.
A2.3.1. Training Period and Date (Item 1). Training period is either ground, simulator, or
flight, i.e., AT-1, GT-1, SIM-3, S-4, etc. Also, annotate the date the training occurred.
A2.3.2. AT, GT, FLY, and ATD (Items 2, 4, and 6). Annotate the amount of time spent on
training. A running total (Items 3, 5, and 7) is obtained by adding previous totals to current
training period time. Classroom academic training periods will be annotated as AT and
tabulated under the ground training block.
A2.3.3. Total Training Time (Item 8). Keep a running total of all training time (add Items 3,
5, and 7) by adding previous totals to the current training period time period. NOTE: Formal
school instructors are not required to record the time on the Form 4023 if the time is tracked
by other means.
144 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
A2.3.4. Remarks and Recommendations (Item 9). Describe the mission scenario to
accurately document each event (i.e., payload, type airdrops, type and number of approaches,
etc.). Local overprints are authorized. Comments will elaborate on trainee strengths and
weaknesses, identify problem areas, record unusual circumstances, and indicate student
progress. Recommendations will be specific and include tasks requiring further training and
the type of training required. If more space is required for annotating remarks, draw vertical
arrows through sortie information heading section (Items 1 through 8) of following block of
form and continue remarks.
A2.3.5. Instructor Block (Item 10). Instructors will print and sign their name and annotate
their rank and crew qualification.
A2.3.6. Students Block (Item 11). Students will print and sign their name.
A2.3.7. Reviewer Block (Item 12). For Operations Reviews, Sq/CCs, operations officers, or
flight commanders will print and sign their name and indicate their position. Flight
commanders may use their initials in the review block after reviewing individual AF Form
4023 entries.
A2.3.7.1. Monthly and Quarterly Reviews. In addition to reviewing all AF Form 4023
entries, the flight commander or squadron training representative will conduct a monthly
review of active status AF Forms 4022. The Sq/CC or operations officer will review
active status AF Forms 4022 at least once each calendar quarter. Document reviews on
an AF Form 4023. The reviewer will annotate "monthly review" or "quarterly review,"
as applicable, in the training period block. Write comments concerning the trainee's
progress, status, or recommendations in the mission profile, comments, and
recommendations block. Also, see paragraph A2.6.4.4.
A2.3.7.2. Monthly and quarterly reviews are not required for FTU courses except in
documented cases of unsatisfactory progress. ATS personnel will review the student’s
records and ensure all required training is completed prior to entering flight training. If
problems are encountered during the flying phase, the squadron will conduct reviews
necessary to document unsatisfactory progress.
A2.3.8. AF Form 4023 will be completed and reviewed by the student prior to his or her
next training period.
A2.4. Instructions for the AF Form 4024, Aircrew Training Accomplishment Report. This
form tracks, for each sortie, individual event and task accomplishment and grades. Units will
overprint event and task listings, total number of repetitions required, and the required
proficiency level (RPL) for each event and task. Simulator, ground training, and flight training
events may be combined on a single Form 4024 provided they are separated and labeled in the
Training Event/Task Listing column. Maintain AF Forms 4024 on the right side of AF Form
4022. NOTE: The AF Form 4024 is optional if a training guide is used to record training.
A2.4.1. Name. Self-explanatory.
A2.4.2. Crew Position. Self-explanatory.
A2.4.3. Course or Phase of Training. Enter the ETCA formal course identifier, e.g.,
C130PIQ. For special mission qualification, enter the type and identify the method of
training, e.g., WST training, flying training, etc.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 145
A2.4.4. Sortie. Enter sortie number e.g., S-1, S-2, CPT-1, etc.
A2.4.5. Date.
A2.4.6. Training Event and Task Listing. Reflects the tasks and subtasks in the training
program that require specific student performance or knowledge proficiency standards.
A2.4.7. Number Accomplished. Reflects the number of times an event was accomplished on
that sortie.
A2.4.8. Grade. Enter a "B", "F," "P," "S," or "U," as appropriate.
A2.4.8.1. ―B‖; Briefing item only.
A2.4.8.2. "F"; Familiarization item; proficiency is not required. The OG/CC will
determine whether "F" items are completed by briefing, demonstration, observation, or
actual accomplishment.
A2.4.8.3. "P"; Proficient; the crewmember has achieved the required proficiency level.
A2.4.8.4. "S"; Satisfactory; the crewmember has not achieved the required proficiency
level but progress is satisfactory.
A2.4.8.5. "U"; Unsatisfactory; the crewmember was previously proficient, but has
regressed or progress is unsatisfactory.
A2.4.9. Total Number Required. Indicates the total repetitions of an event or task required
by the course syllabus.
A2.4.10. Total Number Accomplished. Total of the number of repetitions actually
accomplished.
A2.4.11. Required Proficiency Level (RPL). RPL for the specific event and task. Each
event and task will have a performance standard designated for the required proficiency level
the crewmember will achieve. In addition, each event and task may have (optional) a
knowledge standard designated and used in the same manner as a performance standard. The
standards for specific events are either listed in the applicable master task list (MTL) and
evaluation standards document (ESD) for each weapon system or identified in this
instruction. For those weapons systems that do not have any RPL listing, all events will have
an RPL of "3" for performance and "C" for knowledge (if knowledge standards are used in
addition to performance standards). EXCEPTION: One-time events required for
familiarization and not listed in the MTL and ESD or specific weapon system instruction will
not have performance and knowledge standard assigned. Performance and knowledge
standards are listed in Table A2.1.
A2.4.11.1. Regression. Once a crewmember has received ―P‖ for an event, the only
subsequent grade allowed for that event is either ―P‖ or ―U‖. Regression occurs when a
maneuver is graded ―U‖ after having achieved ―P‖ in the same task. Regression from a
―P‖ to a ―U‖ requires an explanation in the student’s training folder. The overall grade is
at the instructor’s discretion. For regression, the student will re-obtain proficiency prior
to the end of the block of training in order to be recommended for a flight evaluation
(when applicable) or certification (when applicable).
146 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
A2.4.11.2. Proficiency Advance. In order to recommend a crewmember for a flight
evaluation (when applicable) or certification (associated with completion of training), the
final grade for each event will meet the Required Proficiency Level (RPL) and the total
number accomplished will normally meet or exceed the Total Number Required.
EXCEPTION: Highly proficient crewmembers may be ―proficiency advanced‖ and the
total number accomplished may be less than the Total Number Required.
Table A2.1. Event and Task Standards.
Event and Task Performance Standard
Code Performance is: Definition:
1 Extremely Limited Individual can do most activities only after being told or shown how.
2 Partially Proficient Individual can do most of the behaviors, but not necessarily to the
desired levels of speed, accuracy, and safety.
3 Proficient Individual can do and show others how to do the behavior in an activity
at the minimum acceptable levels of speed, accuracy, and safety
without the assistance of an instructor. For copilots, proficiency may
involve actual aircraft control or copilot duties only. For instructors,
proficiency includes the ability to demonstrate, instruct, and supervise
ground and flight activity.
4 Highly Proficient Individual can do behaviors in an activity at the highest level of speed,
accuracy and safety.
Event and Task Knowledge Standard
Code Knowledge of: Definition:
A Facts and
Nomenclature
Individual can identify basic facts and terms about the subject and when
used with a performance code, can state nomenclature, simple facts, or
procedures involved in an activity.
B Principles and
Procedures
Individual can explain relationship of basic facts and state general
principles about the subject and when used with a performance code, can
determine step-by-step procedures for sets of activities
C Analysis, and
Operating Principles
Individual can analyze facts and principles and draw conclusions about
the subject and when used with a performance code, can describe why
and when each activity will be done and tell others how to accomplish
activities
D Evaluation and
Complete Theory
Individual can evaluate conditions and create new rules or concepts about
the subject and when used with a performance code, can inspect, weigh,
and design solutions related to the theory involved with activities.
A2.5. Instructions for AF Form 4025, Aircrew Summary and Close-out Report.
A2.5.1. For each formal school training program leading to qualification, a summary and
close-out report will be completed detailing the individual's strengths, weaknesses, overall
performance, and other pertinent information. This report will be filed in the crewmember’s
training folder. For in-unit training and training programs leading to certification, this form
is optional.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 147
A2.5.2. Comments on this form should not reflect personal opinions or biases. All comments
will be supported by information contained in the AF Form 4023s, 4024s, or training guides
as applicable. At formal schools, the instructor will accomplish the AF Form 4025 and the
Sq/CC's signature is optional. Refer to the Air Force Records Disposition Schedule (RDS)
located at https://www.my.af.mil/gcss-af61a/afrims/afrims/rims.cfm for further guidance.
USAFE: After one year, training offices will retain the AF Form 4025 in the crewmember's
training folder (AF Form 4022) and all other records may be returned to the individual.
A2.6. Aircrew Training Guides (TG).
A2.6.1. The ATS will develop TGs. Units may produce TGs when the ATS contractor is
unable to provide them. TGs will be developed in accordance with AFI 36-2201v1, Training
Development, Delivery, and Evaluation. Coordinate TG development through appropriate
MAJCOM with an info copy sent to HQ AMC/A3T.
A2.6.2. Initiating TGs. Training and resource management personnel in each unit will
initiate a TG on crew members prior to their entering any phase of qualification training.
These TGs will be inserted in AF Form 4022.
A2.6.3. Use of TGs. Specific instructions for annotating training are included in each TG.
TGs will be placed in an AF Form 4022 and maintained in accordance with paragraph
A2.1.5.
A2.6.3.1. Active status TGs will be carried by the student during all training and
operational missions and made available to the instructor for review and annotation. The
student will review the TG and initial the training progress record prior to the next
training period.
A2.6.3.2. Complete the training progress record portion of the TG in sufficient detail to
specify areas of training accomplished, areas needing improvement, recommended
specific study areas for the trainee, and recommended training for the next training
period. When the trainee attains sufficient knowledge, experience, and prerequisites for
upgrade, the instructor will recommend an evaluation and state: "Recommend evaluation
for (crew position)" on the training progress record. Trainees will not be recommended
for an evaluation if a TG required event is incomplete or requires corrective action.
EXCEPTION: MPD flight simulator ATS progress reviews (evaluations) may be
administered with open areas in the TG.
A2.6.3.3. On missions without an instructor or examiner, the senior qualified counterpart
(e.g., aircraft commander for copilots, qualified flight engineer for flight engineers,
qualified loadmaster for loadmasters, etc.) will accomplish required training for those
areas not requiring an instructor. Annotate applicable training information in the TG.
A2.6.3.4. When an initial qualification flight evaluation is not successfully completed
and additional training is required, the flight commander will annotate deficient areas on
reproduced pages of the appropriate TG and training progress record. This mini-TG will
be placed in the AF Form 4022 and used to document completion of additional training.
A2.6.3.5. At the conclusion of training, when all requirements of the TG are met, fill-out
an AF Form 4025 in accordance with paragraph A2.5. Maintain the TG and associated
AF Form 4025 in a training folder according to paragraph A2.1.5.
148 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
A2.6.3.6. Do not maintain the training guide in the flight evaluation folder.
A2.6.4. Review Procedures.
A2.6.4.1. Instructors and students will review the TG after each training period and
discuss training accomplished, problem areas, and immediate goals. The following are
areas that should be covered in the comments' section:
A2.6.4.1.1. Pilots:
A2.6.4.1.1.1. AD missions. List number and types of drops.
A2.6.4.1.1.2. Applicable NVG Phase of training. Include the number of night-
vision goggles (NVG) landings, low-level routes, and the number or types of
NVG drops.
A2.6.4.1.2. Navigators:
A2.6.4.1.2.1. AD missions. Include number and type of drop.
A2.6.4.1.2.2. Applicable NVG Phase of training. Include the number and types
(verbal, reduced verbal cues) of ARAs, low-level routes, and the number and type
of NVG drops (when applicable).
A2.6.4.1.3. Loadmasters:
A2.6.4.1.3.1. Operational flights or static loads. Enter a general description of the
payload, number of pallets, rolling stock cargo (trucks, engines, tanks, etc.), floor-
loaded general cargo, and passengers, e.g. 8 pallets and 5 passengers.
A2.6.4.1.3.2. AD missions. Enter the words "no drop" when the load did not exit
the aircraft.
A2.6.4.1.3.3. Personnel AD missions. Enter the number of personnel dropped on
each pass, e. g. "first pass-2," "second pass-2," etc.
A2.6.4.1.3.4. Heavy equipment drop missions. Enter a general description of the
load, e.g. "type V, sequential platform (one mass load, one jeep), etc." The
instructor or trainer will sign and enter his or her crew qualification on the
training progress record. The trainee will initial the training progress record.
A2.6.4.2. The flight commander or squadron training representative will conduct a
monthly review of TGs. This review will be indicated by entering initials and date in the
review block of the TG.
A2.6.4.3. The commander or operations officer will review active TGs at least once each
calendar quarter and prior to an evaluation. This review will be a separate entry on the
TG and will include comments on weak areas and upgrade potential. Indicate review by
signing the instructor-trainer block of the training progress record, and enter "quarterly
review" in the training period identifier block.
A2.6.4.4. Records of crewmembers, not receiving training (but in an active status), will
be reviewed monthly and quarterly as indicated above. If applicable, the statement, "no
training accomplished during this period," the reason why, and the projected date when
training will resume will be entered on the student's training progress record.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 149
A2.6.5. Disposition of TGs. Place completed TGs in AF Form 4022 and maintain according
to paragraph A2.1.5.
150 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Attachment 3
C-130 ATS COURSES
A3.1. ATS Courseware Availability. Courseware availability is subject to change according to
mission requirements and the ATS contract.
A3.1.1. Pilot Courses.
Table A3.1. Pilot Courses.
Source Course Qualification MR and Certified ARMS
Designation
UPT PIQ Pilot FPH (left-seat qual; right-seat mission)
FAIP/OSA Cross-Flow PXA Aircraft Commander MP
Mobility Cross-Flow –
No Tactical Experience PXB Aircraft Commander MP
Mobility Cross-Flow –
Previous Tactical Experience PXC Aircraft Commander MP
AC Upgrade PRA Aircraft Commander MP
MPD AC Upgrade PCO Aircraft Commander MP
Requalification PRB Aircraft Commander MP
Instructor PIN Instructor Pilot IP
A3.1.1.1. FTU Pilot Courses.
PIQ Pilot Initial Qualification (Left Seat) - Qualifies undergraduate Pilot Training graduates
in the C-130. Associated with MPD.
PXA Non-Mobility Cross-Flow (FAIP/OSA) - Qualifies new pilots in the C-130.
PXB Experienced Mobility Pilot Cross-Flow (no tactical experience) - Qualifies new pilots in
the C-130.
PXC Experienced Mobility Pilot Cross-Flow (tactical experience) - Qualifies new pilots in the
C-130.
PRA Pilot Requalification (4 - 8 years) - Qualifies pilots in the C-130 who have been
unqualified 39 months at the end of a non-flying assignment or 48 months at the end of any
active flying assignment to 8 years (see AFI 11-202v1). Over 8 years, students will use PXA,
PXB, or PXC. Also used as Aircraft Commander Upgrade course for traditional copilots.
PCO Pilot Check-out Course - Qualifies MPD pilots in pilot-flying assault landings plus other
items as defined by the student’s requirements. Associated with MPD upgrade to Aircraft
Commander.
PRB Pilot Requalification - Qualifies pilots in the C-130 who have been unqualified up to 39
months at the end of a non-flying assignment or 48 months at the end of any active flying
assignment (see AFI 11-202v1).
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 151
PIN Pilot Instructor Qualification. Qualifies pilots as instructors.
SOP-A Senior Officer Course - Pilot Familiarization Short Course – Airland academic and
simulator training conducted at the FTU. Limited in-unit airland flight training culminating in a
flight evaluation. Graduates will fly with an instructor pilot.
SOP-B Senior Officer Course - Pilot Familiarization Short Course – Academic instruction to
include simulator training and FTU airland flight training culminating in a flight evaluation.
Graduates will fly with an instructor pilot.
SOP-C Senior Officer Course - Pilot Long Course – Academic instruction to include simulator
training and FTU Airland flight training culminating in a flight evaluation. Graduates may fly
basic airland missions without an instructor pilot. Provides options for limited mission training
depending on course.
A3.1.1.2. Continuation / In-Unit Pilot Courses.
ACP Aircraft Commander Upgrade Preparation. Prerequisite for the aircraft commander
qualification (PRA) course and consists of ground and flying training; not required for
requalification training.
ALU Aircraft Commander Lead Upgrade. Upgrades ACs to tactical formation lead
certification.
MLS Microwave Landing System. MLS instruction.
PAV Pilot Weather Avoidance. Familiarizes pilots on radar operations.
PCH Pilot H-1 Conversion (Difference Training). Teaches pilots on how to operate the C-
130H1 aircraft.
PCX Pilot H-2 Conversion (Difference Training). Teaches pilots on how to operate the C-
130H2 aircraft.
PCY Pilot H-3 Conversion (Difference Training). Teaches pilots on how to operate the C-
130H3 aircraft.
PIP Pilot Instructor Preparatory Course. Prerequisite for the Pilot Instructor Course (PIN);
contains the aircraft systems information required to complete PIN.
PIX Pilot Instructor Preparatory Course (H-2). Prerequisite for the Pilot Instructor Course
(PIN); contains the aircraft systems information required to complete PIN.
PIY Pilot Instructor Preparatory Course (H-3). Prerequisite for the Pilot Instructor Course
(PIN); contains the aircraft systems information required to complete PIN.
PIR Pilot Instrument Refresher Course. Course completion fulfills AFI 11-202V1
requirements.
PSH Pilot Simulator Refresher Course - H Model. Course completion fulfills AFI 11-202
requirements.
PRT Pilot Simulator Refresher Course - E Model. Course completion fulfills AFI 11-202
requirements.
PSX Pilot Simulator Refresher Course - H-2 Model. Course completion fulfills AFI 11-202
requirements.
152 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
PSY Pilot Simulator Refresher Course - H-3 Model. Course completion fulfills AFI 11-202
requirements.
PAW Pilot AWADS Course - E Model. Teaches pilots about associated procedures for the
Adverse Weather Aerial Delivery System using the C-130E.
PYW Pilot AWADS Course - H-3 Model. Teaches pilots about associated procedures for the
Adverse Weather Aerial Delivery System using the C-130H3.
A3.1.2. Navigator Courses.
A3.1.2.1. FTU Navigator Courses.
NIN Navigator Instructor Qualification. Qualifies navigators as instructors.
NIQ Navigator Initial Qualification - Level 1 (Basic). Qualifies or requalifies navigators in the
C-130.
NIX Navigator Initial Qualification - Level 1 (Basic). Qualifies or requalifies navigators in the
C-130H2.
NMQ Navigator Mission Qualification - Level 2 (Single Ship), Level 3 (Formation). Qualifies
or requalifies navigators in visual and SKE procedures.
NMX Navigator Mission Qualification - Level 2 (Single Ship), Level 3 (Formation). Qualifies
or requalifies navigators in visual and SKE procedures in the C-130H2.
NRK Navigator Mission Requalification - Level 2 (Single Ship), Level 3 (Formation).
Requalifies navigators in visual and SKE procedures.
NRQ Navigator Basic Requalification - Level 1 (Basic). Requalifies navigators on the C-130.
SON-A Senior Officer Navigator Course – Airland academic and simulator training conducted
at the FTU and in-unit flight training and evaluation. Graduates will fly with an instructor
navigator.
SON-B Senior Officer Navigator Familiarization Short Course – FTU Airland academic and
simulator training and FTU flight training with restricted AF Form 8. Graduates will fly with an
instructor navigator.
SON-C Senior Officer Navigation Airland Qualification Course – Airland academic, simulator
and FTU flight training which results in an AFI 11-2C-130v2 Flight Evaluation. Graduates can
fly basic airland missions without an instructor navigator. Provides options for limited mission
training depending on course.
A3.1.2.2. Continuation / In-Unit Navigator Courses
NCX Navigator H-2 Conversion (Difference Training). Trains navigators to operate the C-
130H2.
NCY Navigator H-3 Conversion (Difference Training). Trains navigators to operate the C-
130H3.
NIP Navigator Instructor Preparatory. An in-unit, prerequisite for the Navigator Instructor
(NIN) Course.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 153
NIY Navigator Instructor Preparatory (C-130H3). An in-unit, prerequisite for the Navigator
Instructor (NIN) Course.
NRT Navigator Refresher Training. Annual refresher training for navigators.
NRX Navigator Refresher Training (C-130H2). Annual refresher training for C-130H2
navigators.
NRY Navigator Refresher Training (C-130H3). Annual refresher training for C-130H3
navigators.
NAW Navigator AWADS Course - E Model. Teaches navigators how to use the APQ-175
radar and associated procedures for the Adverse Weather Aerial Delivery System.
NGD Navigator GRID Course. Upgrades navigators to grid qualification.
NHO Navigator HALO/HAHO. Used to train navigators in HALO airdrop procedures.
Academics and flying training are taught in-unit only.
NLU Navigator Lead Upgrade. Upgrades navigators to tactical formation lead qualification.
NYW Navigator AWADS Course - H-3 Model. Teaches AWADS procedures for units
equipped with C-130H3 aircraft.
A3.1.3. Flight Engineer (FE) Courses.
A3.1.3.1. C-130 ATS Formal School Flight Engineer Courses.
FEQ1LP Flight Engineer Initial Qualification. Qualifies flight engineers in C-130 aircraft.
FEQ3LP Flight Engineer Initial and Mission Qualification. Qualifies flight engineers in C-130
aircraft and airdrop mission.
FIN Flight Engineer Instructor Qualification. Qualifies flight engineers as instructors.
A3.1.3.2. Continuation / In-Unit Flight Engineer Courses
FAR Flight Engineer Aircraft Systems Refresher Course - E Model. Annual academic training
designed to re-familiarize flight engineers with C-130E aircraft systems and normal and
emergency procedures.
FCH Flight Engineer H-1 Conversion (Difference Training). Trains flight engineers to operate
the C-130H1.
FCX Flight Engineer H-2 Conversion (Difference Training). Trains flight engineers to operate
the C-130H2.
FCY Flight Engineer H-3 Conversion (Difference Training). Trains flight engineers to operate
the C-130H3.
FHR Flight Engineer Aircraft Systems Refresher Course - H Model. Annual academic training
designed to re-familiarize flight engineers with C-130H aircraft systems and normal and
emergency procedures.
FHX Flight Engineer Aircraft Systems Refresher Course - H-2 Model. Annual academic
training designed to re-familiarize flight engineers with C-130H2 aircraft systems and normal
and emergency procedures.
154 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
FHY Flight Engineer Aircraft Systems Refresher Course - H-3 Model. Annual academic
training designed to re-familiarize flight engineers with C-130H3 aircraft systems and normal
and emergency procedures.
FIP Flight Engineer Instructor Preparatory – E Model. An in-unit, prerequisite for flight
engineer instructor Course (FIN); contains aircraft systems information required to complete
FIN.
FHP Flight Engineer Instructor Preparatory – H Model. An in-unit, prerequisite for flight
engineer instructor Course (FIN); contains aircraft systems information required to complete
FIN.
FIY Flight Engineer Instructor Preparatory – H-3 Model. An in-unit, prerequisite for flight
engineer instructor Course (FIN); contains aircraft systems information required to complete
FIN.
FSH Flight Engineer Simulator Refresher Course - H Model.
FRT Flight Engineer Simulator Refresher Course - E Model.
FSX Flight Engineer Simulator Refresher Course - H-2 Model.
FSY Flight Engineer Simulator Refresher Course - H-3 Model.
HER Flight Engineer Hostile Environment Repair - E and H Model. Taught in conjunction
with flight engineer aircraft systems refresher (FAR & FHR).
HEX Flight Engineer Hostile Environment Repair - H-2 Model. Taught in conjunction with
flight engineer aircraft systems refresher (FHX).
HEY Flight Engineer Hostile Environment Repair - H-3 Model. Taught in conjunction with
flight engineer aircraft systems refresher (FHY).
IRE Flight Engineer Instrument Refresher – E and H Model. Taught in conjunction with
flight engineer aircraft systems refresher (FAR & FHR).
IRX Flight Engineer Instrument Refresher – H-2 Model. Taught in conjunction with flight
engineer aircraft systems refresher (FHX).
IRY Flight Engineer Instrument Refresher – H-3 Model. Taught in conjunction with flight
engineer aircraft systems refresher (FHY).
A3.1.4. Loadmaster Courses.
A3.1.4.1. FTU Courses
LIN Loadmaster Instructor Qualification. Qualifies LMs as instructors.
LMQ1LP Loadmaster Initial Qualification. Qualifies loadmasters in C-130 aircraft.
LMQ3LP Loadmaster Mission Qualification. Qualifies loadmasters in C-130 aircraft and
airdrop mission.
A3.1.4.2. Continuation / In-Unit Loadmaster Courses
LAD Loadmaster Aerial Delivery Refresher Training. Airdrop training.
LRT Loadmaster Refresher Training. Includes Airland and Aerial Delivery Training.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 155
LIP LM Instructor Preparatory. An in-unit, prerequisite for LM Instructors (LIN).
A3.2. C-130 Course Numbering System. Training Management System (TMS) Identifier
Codes
Aircraft Type (Characters 1-5)
C130E E/H-1
C130H H-2/H-3
C130J J
C130X AMP
TYPE TRAINING (Characters 6-8)
Pilot Initial Qualification (SUPT Grad) PIQ (MPD)
Aircraft Commander Qualification PRA (Also requal 5 to 8 years)
Requalification PRB (39 months to 5 years)
TX 1 (FAIP/OSA/Fighter/Bomber) PXA (No Mobility Aircraft experience)
TX 2 (Experienced Mobility Pilot with no TAC) PXB
TX 3 (Experienced Mobility Pilot with TAC) PXC
Instructor Pilot PIN
Senior Officer Pilot SOP
Pilot Conversion Training PCT
Pilot Check-Out PCO
Navigator Qualification NIQ
Navigator Requalification NRQ
Instructor Navigator Qualification NIN
Senior Officer –Navigator SON
Flight Engineer Qualification FEQ
Instructor Flight Engineer FIN
Loadmaster Qualification LMQ
Instructor Loadmaster LIN
Loadmaster Conversion Training LCT
TYPE TRAINING (9thCharacter)
0 = Not Applicable
1 = Initial Qualification
2 = Initial and Single Ship Mission Qualification
3 = Initial and Formation Mission Qualification
4 = Single Ship Mission Qualification
5 = Formation Mission Qualification
A = Senior Officer Familiarization Course (Academic Only)
B = Senior Officer Familiarization Course (Flying Course w/ restricted AF Form 8)
C = Senior Officer Initial Qualification Course
LOCATION OF TRAINING (Characters 10-11) (taken from AF PAS code identifiers)
Little Rock, AR LP
Dobbins, GA R9
Nashville, TN UT
156 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
Example: C130EPXA3LP = C-130E, Pilot Transition, Initial and Mission Qualification, @
Little Rock AFB, AR.
OPR is HQ AETC/A3ZM, Randolph AFB TX, DSN 487-2014.
AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010 157
Attachment 4
AIRDROP SCORING
A4.1. Airdrop Scoring. Crewmembers may credit an airdrop event if the load exits the aircraft
and is scored as a successful drop. See specific event description in Chapter 7 for additional
guidance.
A4.1.1. In order to be considered successful, the adjusted drop score must fall within the
basic allowable circular error. For personnel and equipment airdrops use 300 meters. For
Containerized Delivery System (CDS) use 200 meters. To determine the adjusted drop score,
first make distance adjustments then, if applicable, adjust for wingman position. NOTE:
HALO / HAHO airdrops are graded satisfactory if personnel land on the drop zone, or
unsatisfactory if they do not.
A4.1.2. Distance Adjustments. There are two distance adjustments that may apply: altitude
corrections and night VFR corrections.
A4.1.2.1. Altitude corrections. For personnel and equipment airdrops above 800' AGL,
add 15 meters for each 100' above 800' to a maximum total CE of 600 meters. For CDS
airdrops above 600' AGL, add 20 meters for each 100' above 600' to a maximum total CE
of 400 meters. NOTE: Do not interpolate, just add 15 or 20 meters for every 100-foot
increment above the minimum drop altitude.
A4.1.2.2. Night VFR corrections. For night visual airdrops, add 50 meters to allowable
CE not to exceed the above maximums. NOTE: This correction applies to night visual
drops (including visual wingmen) and SKE lead drops using visual procedures at night
(but never SKE wingmen).
A4.1.2.3. Add the altitude corrections to the basic allowable CE to get the adjusted CE.
NOTE: If a day VFR drop is made within 100 feet of the minimum drop altitude, the
adjusted CE is equal to the basic allowable CE.
A4.1.2.4. Take the drop score distance, multiply by the basic allowable CE and divide by
the adjusted CE to get the adjusted drop score.
A4.1.2.5. Example: A night visual HE airdrop made 150 feet above minimum drop
altitude with a basic drop score of 50 meters at 12 o’clock. The basic allowable CE is
300 meters plus 15 meters (altitude correction) plus 50 meters (night VFR correction)
results in an adjusted CE of 365 meters. The adjusted drop score would then be the
product of 50 meters multiplied by 300 meters divided by 365 meters, or 41.1 meters.
A4.1.3. Wingman Adjustments.
A4.1.3.1. VFR Wingmen Adjustments. This drop score will be in relation to an adjusted
point of impact (PI), referred to as the reference PI. The reference PI is an adjustment to
element lead’s drop score along the 12/6 o’clock axis such that it intersects the 3/9
o’clock axis (if required). When the drift is less than three degrees, right wingmen will
move reference PI 50 yards right, and measure their load’s impact point from this
adjusted reference PI. The Wingman’s PI is the reference PI when the drift is three
degrees or greater, in-trail wingmen should follow the same ground track as
158 AFI11-2C-130V1 30 APRIL 2010
formation/element lead. Three degrees or greater requires no right/left adjustment.
Distance adjustments as described in A4.1.2 apply to adjust circular error.
A4.1.3.2. SKE Wingman Adjustments. This drop score will be in relation to the
reference PI when the drift correction setting is two degrees or less in the SKE secondary
control panel. Lead’s (or element lead’s) drop will be adjusted along the 3/9 o’clock axis
and offset as indicated in table A4.1. Drift more than 3 degrees is not adjusted from
Lead’s PI. Distance adjustments as described in A4.1.2 apply to adjust circular error.
Note: Night VFR Wingman Adjustments do not apply to SKE drops. Exception: Non-
AWADS units using visual procedures.
Table A4.1. SKE Wingmen Adjustment to Lead’s Drop Score.
Degrees of Drift Right Wingmen adjust Lead’s
drop
3 or more Right 0 meters
2 Right 49.5 meters left
1 Right 67.5 meters left
0 Drift 90 meters right
1 Left 67.5 meters right
2 Left 49.5 meters right
3 or more Left 0 meters
